Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR 433H S User Manual
DVD Recorder  
DVR-433H-S  
DVR-433H-K  
®
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property rights owned by  
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked  
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the  
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of  
this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
equipment.  
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in  
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or  
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure  
due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-  
term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a  
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for  
strong artificial light)  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
even during the warranty period.  
K041_En  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
10 cm at each side).  
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC  
corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC  
Corporation.  
WARNING  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when not left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel.  
The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must  
not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can  
result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the  
distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse.  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
appliance may not correspond with coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,  
proceed as follows ;  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected  
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or  
coloured black.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be  
connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter L or coloured red.  
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a  
three pin plug.  
IMPORTANT  
NOTE  
FOR USE IN THE UNITED  
KINGDOM  
After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in  
the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which  
corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base  
of the plug or the word that is embossed on the  
base of the plug, and the appliance must not be  
used without a fuse cover. If lost replacement fuse  
covers can be obtained from your dealer.  
Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T.A to  
B.S.1362 should be used.  
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in  
accordance with the following code:  
Blue  
: Neutral  
Brown : Live  
If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket  
outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug  
fitted.  
D3-4-2-1-2-2_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 49  
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 51  
Initializing a recordable DVD disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
01 Before you start  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8  
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9  
About the internal hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
06 Playback  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a  
disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Switching DVD soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
02 Connecting up  
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Front panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13  
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital  
terrestrial receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Plugging in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
07 Copying and back-up  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Using Copy Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Using disc back-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
03 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
08 Editing  
04 Getting started  
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Command menu panel options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Editing accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
HDD genres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Switching on and setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and  
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
09 Using the Jukebox  
Copying CDs to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Playing music from the Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
05 Recording  
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Recording time and picture quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 39  
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
10 The PhotoViewer  
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 The Disc Setup menu  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs 89  
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 90  
Audio DRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
13 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
14 Additional information  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Manual recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 109  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Index  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
•
On-screen Help  
Use the HELP button on the remote control to display a  
Features  
help screen for the current operation.  
HDD  
•
HDD recording  
•
Disc Navigator  
Record up to 227 hours of video (in MN1 mode) on the  
internal 80 GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD). With both  
recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in the same  
recorder, you have the flexibility to keep recordings on the  
HDD for quick access anytime, or record to DVD for  
archiving or playing on other DVD players.  
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way  
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For  
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail  
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator  
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD  
content.  
•
Copy between HDD and DVD  
•
Home Menu  
You can quickly and easily copy recordings between the  
HDD and DVD. When copying to DVD you can usually  
use the high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour  
of video in about one minute (when recorded in SEP  
mode using a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 2.1 (16x) disc).  
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the  
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting  
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and  
editing a recording.  
•
Progressive scan-compatible  
You can also choose to copy material at a different  
recording quality from the original. For example, you  
might want to copy an XP mode (highest quality)  
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a  
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same  
disc.  
Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan  
effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to  
your TV or monitor. The result is a stable, flicker-free  
image. (Check your TV/monitor for compatibility with this  
feature.)  
•
Cinema-style surround sound in your home  
•
One Touch Copy  
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-  
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound  
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.  
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title  
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing  
a button.  
•
Easy Timer Recording  
•
High quality, real-time copying  
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from  
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to  
record and the recording quality, then graphically set the  
start and end times of the recording. That’s it!  
When recording to the HDD, picture quality data is also  
stored so that picture quality can be optimized when  
making real-time copies to DVD later.  
(This is applicable only to MN16–32 HDD recordings  
(Video Mode Off), or MN12–32 / XP+ recordings (Video  
Mode On).  
•
Program up to 32 timer recordings  
You can program the recorder to record up to 32  
programs, up to a month in advance. As well as single  
programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings,  
too.  
VR mode  
HDD  
•
Chase play  
Using chase play you can start watching a recording  
from the beginning, while continuing to record. For  
example, you could set a timer recording for a program  
that you’re going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then  
start watching while the recorder is still recording the  
program 15 minutes ahead of you.  
®
*
is a registered trademark of Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
The VIDEO Plus+ system is manufactured under  
license from Gemstar Development Corporation.  
•
One Touch Recording  
•
Simultaneous recording and playback  
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately  
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the ì REC  
button, the recording time is extended by another 30  
minutes, up to six hours.  
VR mode  
HDD  
HDD and DVD playback and recording are completely  
independent. For example, you can record a broadcast  
program to a recordable DVD, while watching another  
recording you already made on the same DVD.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
•
Optimized recording  
•
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD  
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality  
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc  
with the settings that you made.  
Video mode  
player  
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back  
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives  
compatible with DVD-Video playback .  
* ‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-Video format for  
recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in  
‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-  
R / DVD-RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback  
equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play  
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.  
*
•
Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or  
other set top box  
With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to  
the AV2/AUTO START REC inputs of this recorder, you  
can start and stop recording automatically according to  
the timer settings of the set top box.  
HDD  
•
Super high quality HDD recording  
•
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback  
Using the XP+ recording mode you can record super  
high quality video (around 15 Mbps data transfer rate) to  
the HDD.  
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and  
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.  
•
Disc Back-up  
•
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio  
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to  
back-up important material on a finalized Video mode  
DVD to another recordable DVD disc. The material is first  
copied to the HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.  
In the LPCM recording mode, audio is recorded in  
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers  
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture  
quality.  
•
Picture quality adjustment features  
HDD  
•
Recovery Recording  
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality  
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the  
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to  
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize  
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.  
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc  
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the  
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.  
HDD  
•
Auto Replace Recording  
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV  
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.  
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one  
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete  
it later.  
•
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily  
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct  
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the  
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc  
by title, chapter or time.  
•
Manual recording  
In addition to six preset recording quality modes, the  
manual recording mode allows you to access 34 different  
recording quality/time settings, giving you precise  
control over the recording.  
Note on copying:  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you  
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in  
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as  
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or  
consented to by the rightowners.  
•
Record from a DV camcorder  
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input for  
connection to a DV camcorder. This makes it ideal for  
transferring camcorder footage to DVD or HDD for  
editing.  
VR mode  
•
Safe, non-destructive editing  
When editing Play List content, the actual content of the  
disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited  
version (the Play List content) just points to various parts  
of the Original content.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
What’s in the box  
01  
Important  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as  
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:  
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the  
box when you open it.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.  
• Remote control  
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—  
although they may look similar, different batteries  
may have different voltages.  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2  
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)  
• RF antenna cable  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications in the battery  
compartment.  
• Power cable  
• These operating instructions  
• Warranty card  
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to  
be used for a month or more.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
control  
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the  
back of the remote control.  
Using the remote control  
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the  
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
2
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery  
compartment following the indications (ꢀ,ꢁ) inside  
the compartment.  
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other  
equipment located close to this unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the  
operating range of the remote.  
• When the batteries run down or you change the  
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset  
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control  
Mode on page 98 to reset them.  
3
Close the cover.  
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote  
control sensor on the front panel, as shown.  
7 m  
• You can control this recorder using the remote  
sensor of another Pioneer component using the  
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel  
connections on page 12 for more information.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD  
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt  
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs  
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we  
recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs.  
Disc / content format playback  
compatibility  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’  
limited compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs.  
General disc compatibility  
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc  
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally  
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc  
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as  
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable  
format—see below for further compatibility information.  
Model  
Playable  
Yes1,2,3  
Yes1  
Recordable  
DVR-7000  
No  
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H  
No  
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized  
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.  
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when  
DVD-Video  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.  
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
CD-R/RW compatibility  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.  
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD,  
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG  
files  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:  
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file  
systems are both compatible with this recorder.  
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD  
•
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and  
Video CD/Super VCD)  
•
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.  
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD  
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super  
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two  
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the  
widescreen size.  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),  
Windows Media Audio (WMA)  
VIDEO  
CD  
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz  
Super Video CD (Super VCD)  
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
DVD-R/RW compatibility  
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.  
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec  
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be  
playable but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)  
Compatible media:  
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x, Ver. 1.2 / 2–4x and Ver.  
1.2 / 2–6x  
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No  
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 113)  
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x/ 16x, and Ver. 2.1  
1–8x / 1–16x  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for  
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do  
not use for other file types)  
Recording formats:  
• DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-  
Video format (Video mode)  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these  
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these  
limits are playable)  
Readable formats:  
• DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-  
Video format (Video mode)  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility  
Frequently asked questions  
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?  
The most important difference between DVD-R and  
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,  
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.  
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc  
approximately 1,000 times.  
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates  
For more information, see About DVD recording on  
page 37.  
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio  
content.  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers  
to an audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by  
• What’s VR mode?  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode  
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible  
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video  
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are  
more compatible with other DVD players.  
®
®
using Windows Media Player for Windows XP,  
®
®
Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10  
series.  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• How do I change the format of a disc?  
Both DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for  
Video mode or VR mode recording. DVD-R discs are  
ready for Video mode recording when you first load  
them into the recorder. You can, however, initialize  
them for VR mode recording from the Disc Setup  
menu.  
JPEG file compatibility  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*  
still image files  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
DVD-RW discs can be initialized and re-initialized for  
either mode at any time (although initializing will  
erase all the data on the disc).  
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?  
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jif, .jfif (must be used for  
the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for  
other file types)  
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded  
in Video mode* are playable in a standard DVD  
player, but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process  
fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable  
to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.  
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders  
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders  
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)  
DVD-R discs recorded in VR mode are not playable in  
standard DVD players, but may be playable in other  
DVD recorders and DVD-ROM drives (in the case of  
DVD-ROM drives, the disc will need to be finalized  
first).  
PC-created disc compatibility  
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be  
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application  
software used to create the disc. In these particular  
instances, check with the software publisher for more  
detailed information.  
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in  
some players and other recorders.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are  
not compatible with this recorder.  
Note that discs may not play due to recording or disc  
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc or pickup  
lens, etc.  
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes  
for additional compatibility information.  
This label indicates playback compatibility with  
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video  
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with  
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can  
only be achieved using a CPRM compatible device.  
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs  
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
*
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to  
protect against possible HDD failure.  
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-  
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs  
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s  
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-  
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD  
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback  
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs  
recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store  
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up  
your important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to  
protect against accidental loss.  
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept  
resposibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any  
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from  
HDD failure.  
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.  
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’  
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection  
system (see CPRM on page 38) on CPRM-compliant  
discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid  
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden  
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to form inside  
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.  
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of  
editing can I do?  
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD  
recorder to edit discs. With VR mode discs, you can  
edit by making a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when  
to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc  
according to the Play List.  
• Do not move the recorder immediately after  
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,  
please follow the steps below:  
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the  
display, wait at least two minutes.  
Original  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Title 3  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3 Chapter 1  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
3 Move the recorder.  
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on  
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be  
lost.  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an  
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD  
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems  
include playback unexpectedly freezing and  
Title 1  
Title 2  
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.  
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs  
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of  
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will  
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Play List  
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words  
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content  
and the edited version.  
Optimizing HDD performance  
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded  
on the disc.  
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on  
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the  
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the  
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD  
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see  
Optimize HDD on page 88).  
• Play List content refers to the edited version of the  
disc—how the Original content is to be played.  
About the internal hard disk drive  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of  
equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it  
is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the  
recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or  
that normal playback and recording will not be possible.  
Please understand that in the event of repair or  
replacement of the HDD or related components, all your  
HDD recordings will be lost.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Chapter 2  
Connecting up  
Rear panel connections  
1
2
3
4
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
IN  
AC IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV 1 (RGB) – TV  
L
ANTENNA  
R
L
R
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
P
R
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT 3  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
5
6
7
8
9
1
AV2/AUTO START REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV  
8
INPUT 3  
connector  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for  
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for  
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART  
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.  
See AV2/L1 In on page 94 for how to set this up.  
connection to a VCR or other source component.  
9
OUTPUT  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for  
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.  
2
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for  
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART  
connector. The video output is switchable between video,  
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 94 for how  
to set this up.  
Front panel connections  
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or  
DV  
I
N
S-  
VI  
D
EO  
V
I
D
E
O
L
(
M
ONO)  
R
monitor with a component video input.  
A
UDIO  
I
NPUT  
2
4
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT  
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)  
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT  
jack for connection to your TV.  
10  
11  
On the right side of the front panel a flip-down cover  
hides more connections.  
5
AC IN – Power inlet  
10 DV IN  
6
CONTROL IN  
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a  
DV camcorder.  
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of  
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT  
terminal and bearing the Pioneer ꢂ mark. Connect the  
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL  
IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.  
11 Audio/video input 2  
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and  
S-video video), especially suitable for camcorders, game  
consoles, portable audio, etc.  
7
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
Optical digital audio jack for connecting to an AV  
amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG decoder or  
other equipment with a digital input.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Extra features for use with  
compatible TVs  
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features i/o  
Link. A, AV Link, T-V Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic,  
SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA LOGIC or NexTView Link  
using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable (not supplied), the  
following functions are available:  
• Direct TV recording  
• Channel preset download  
• NexTView timer programming download  
• TV auto power on  
• System configuration  
For further details and compatibility information, see also  
the manual that came with your TV.  
Direct TV recording  
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program  
that you’re watching, without having to worry about  
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See  
Direct recording from TV on page 40 for more on this  
feature.  
Channel preset download  
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of  
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and  
preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and  
setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting on  
page 93 for more on this feature.  
NexTView timer programming download  
NexTView timer programming download allows you to  
program a timer recording directly from the NexTView  
electronic program guide displayed on your TV.  
See the manual that came with your TV for more  
information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP  
and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP  
and LP recording modes on this recorder.  
TV auto power on  
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV  
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video  
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to  
use this feature.  
System configuration  
Basic settings, including language, country and TV  
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your  
TV to help set up this recorder for use.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Easy connections  
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other  
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.  
Important  
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see  
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.  
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.  
The AV2/AUTO START REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as  
well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 94 and AV2/L1 In on page 94 for how to set them up.  
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV  
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.  
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect  
it to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder  
and skip the next step.  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to  
3
TV  
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the  
ANTENNA IN (RF IN) of this recorder.  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
4
3
Use another RF antenna cable to connect the  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
L
–
TV  
ANTENNA  
CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input  
on your TV.  
P
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
4
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
5
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the  
SCART AV connector on your TV.  
2
5
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
AUTO START REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your VCR.  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Tip  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows  
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner  
in this recorder while watching a video playing on  
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in  
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power  
Save on page 92).  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Using other types of audio/video output  
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output  
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.  
Using the supplied audio/video cable  
Using the S-video or component video  
output  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT  
TV  
1
2
2
1
TV  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(GB)  
L
–
TV  
ANTENNA  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
L
R
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RB)  
L
–
TV  
ANTENNA  
P
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
L
R
CONTROL  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
3
OUTPUT  
P
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
3
OUTPUT  
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input  
1
Connect the S-video or component video output  
on your TV.  
to a similar input on your TV.  
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for  
the video connection.  
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not  
supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an S-  
video input on your TV  
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the  
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.  
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video  
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up  
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs  
for correct stereo sound.  
For a component video connection, use a component  
video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.  
See also Component Video Out on page 94 for how to set  
up the component video output for use with a progressive  
scan-compatible TV.  
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the  
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.  
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the  
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up  
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs  
for correct stereo sound.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver  
If you have a cable, satellite or digital terrestrial receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV  
1
as shown on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the  
instructions on the next page.  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect  
each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.  
Tip  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows  
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner  
in this recorder while watching a video playing on  
ANTENNA  
IN  
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in  
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power  
Save on page 92).  
2
TV  
1
ANTENNA  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
A
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
L
–
TV  
CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
L
R
P
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
3
1
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
Cable/Satellite/  
Digital Terrestrial  
receiver  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Satellite dish/  
antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector  
on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/  
AUTO START REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your cable box/satellite/  
digital terrestrial receiver.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
Note  
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting an external decoder box (1)  
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this  
page.  
Important  
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.  
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off  
(in standby).  
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched  
on during recording.  
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV  
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite  
receiver/cable box.  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your  
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.  
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed  
instructions.  
4
TV  
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite  
receiver/cable box to the AV2/AUTO START  
REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this  
recorder.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
L
–
TV  
ANTENNA  
CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
P
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV  
AV connector to your TV.  
3
2
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
Decoder  
VCR/Satellite receiver  
/Cable box  
ANTENNA  
IN  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting an external decoder box (2)  
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
1
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
ANTENNA  
IN  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector  
on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
2
TV  
1
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
AUTO START REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
L
–
TV  
CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
P
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
1
3
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
Decoder  
Note  
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:  
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 94).  
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 93).  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver  
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital  
optical output.  
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for  
compatibility with all discs and sources.  
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as  
shown here), or the S-video output.  
Important  
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver  
properly (see Audio Out Settings on page 95).  
ANTENNA  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
TV  
1
4
VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
AV amp/  
receiver  
2
ANTENNA  
OUT  
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Y
P
B
AC IN  
IN  
OUT  
AV 2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB)  
L
–
TV  
ANTENNA  
CONTROL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
R
L
R
P
R
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
3
OUTPUT  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
Important  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’  
your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly  
to your TV.  
2
Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack on  
this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround  
sound.  
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio  
and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver.  
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video output  
to a video input on your TV.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is possible to connect  
a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder  
and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to  
DVD-R/RW.  
Connecting other AV sources  
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder  
ꢃ
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
ꢂ
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ENTER  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
PULL  
-
OPEN  
ꢅ
HOME  
MENU  
ꢄ
ꢆ
ꢅ
RETURN  
ì
REC  
ꢄ
ꢇ
STANDBY/ON  
Important  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is  
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-  
VHS video decks.  
1
2
ꢃ
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
ꢂ
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ENTER  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
PULL  
-
OPEN  
ꢅ
HOME  
MENU  
ꢄ
ꢆ
ꢅ
RETURN  
ì
REC  
ꢄ
ꢇ
STANDBY/ON  
DV  
IN  
Analog camcorder  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
DV  
OUT  
VCR  
DV camcorder  
1
Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your  
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this  
recorder.  
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR  
1
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV  
jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front  
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.  
or camcorder.  
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the  
video connection.  
Plugging in  
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2/AUTO START  
REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for  
audio/video input and output with just one SCART  
cable.  
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.  
1
Use the supplied power cable to connect this  
recorder to a power outlet.  
2
Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your  
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or  
camcorder.  
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the  
video connection.  
• The front panel connections make convenient  
connections for a camcorder input.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ꢃ
OPEN/CLOSE  
HDD/DVD  
ꢂ
TOP MENU  
MENU  
PULL - OPEN  
ꢅ
ENTER  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
HOME  
MENU  
ꢄ
ꢆ
ꢅ
ì
REC  
ꢄ
RETURN  
ꢇ
STANDBY/ON  
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
13 RETURN  
9
1
ꢇ STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or  
display.  
2
Disc tray  
14 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
select the currently highlighted option.  
3
DISC NAVIGATOR/TOP MENU  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top  
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.  
When stopped, the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons can also be used to  
change the TV channel.  
4
ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
15 HOME MENU (page 34)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can  
navigate all the functions of the recorder.  
5
HDD/DVD indicator  
Lights blue when the HDD is selected; orange when DVD  
is selected.  
16 ꢅ  
6
HDD/DVD  
Press to start or restart playback.  
Press to switch between the hard disk drive (HDD) and  
17 ꢆ  
DVD for recording and playback.  
Press to pause or resume playback.  
7
MENU  
18 ꢄ  
Press to display a DVD-Video disc menu.  
Press to stop playback.  
8
Front panel display and IR remote sensor  
See Display on page 24 for details.  
9
Front panel inputs (page 12)  
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front  
panel input jacks (audio, video and DV). Especially  
convenient for connecting camcorders and other  
portable equipment.  
10 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 63)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD. See also the Note on copying on  
page 7.  
11 ꢀ  
Press to stop recording.  
12 ì REC  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in 30 minute blocks.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
5
Number buttons  
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title  
selection; channel selection, and so on. The same  
buttons can also be used to enter names for titles,  
discs and so on.  
Remote control  
1
2
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) (page 29, 61)  
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the  
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner  
audio.)  
4
6
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
3
5
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
SUBTITLE (SHIFT + 2) (page 60)  
Displays/changes the subtitles included in  
multilingual DVD-Video discs.  
CHANNEL  
7
ANGLE (SHIFT + 3) (page 62)  
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle  
scenes.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
VIDEO Plus+  
MENU  
8
9
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
6
CLEAR  
10  
11  
HOME  
MENU  
Use to clear an entry and start again.  
RETURN  
12  
7
CHANNEL +/– (page 29)  
ꢋ
ꢊ
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
13  
8
DISC NAVIGATOR (page 54, 73) / TOP MENU  
(page 32)  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
ì
REC  
SHIFT  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top  
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.  
16  
14  
15  
TV DRECT REC  
9
VIDEO Plus+ (SHIFT + MENU) (page 43) / MENU  
(page 32)  
Press to set a timer program using VIDEO Plus+, or  
display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.  
DVD RECORDER  
10 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
select the currently highlighted option.  
1
ꢇ STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
2
HDD/DVD (page 27)  
11 HOME MENU (page 34)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can  
navigate all the functions of the recorder.  
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording  
or playback.  
3
4
HELP  
12 RETURN (page 98)  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or  
display. Also used for setting the remote control mode.  
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.  
DISPLAY (SHIFT + HELP) (page 34)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information  
displays.  
13 Playback controls (page 31)  
ꢈ / ꢉ (page 56)  
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press  
again to change the speed.  
INPUT SELECT (page 48)  
Press to change the input to use for recording.  
TV/DVD (SHIFT + INPUT SELECT) (page 30)  
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get  
the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD  
mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the  
recorder’s tuner (or an external input).  
ꢅ
Press to start playback.  
ꢆ
Press to pause playback or recording.  
ꢄ
Press to stop playback.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) (page 39)  
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode  
(picture quality).  
ꢌ / ꢍ  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/  
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu  
page.  
CM BACK (SHIFT + ꢌ) (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward  
through the audio or video playing.  
CM SKIP (SHIFT + ꢍ) (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward  
through the audio or video playing.  
ꢎ/ꢋ / ꢊ/ꢏ (page 56)  
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion  
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback  
speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single frame in  
either direction.  
14 SHIFT  
Hold down SHIFT to access the functions on the remote  
printed in green. For example, press and hold SHIFT, then  
press ꢄ for REC MODE.  
15 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 63)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD.  
16 Recording controls (page 28)  
ꢀ STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
ì REC  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.  
TV DIRECT REC (SHIFT + ì REC) (page 40)  
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is  
set to.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Display  
1
9
2 3  
4
5
L
R
P
8
7
6
1
ꢅ
6
7
Character display  
R / RW  
Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.  
2
ꢃ
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or  
DVD-RW.  
Lights when copying.  
3
ì
8
AUTO  
Lights during recording; blinks when recording is  
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and  
paused.  
during Auto Start Recording.  
9
PL (page 73)  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the  
recorder is in Play List mode.  
4
(page 41)  
Lights when a timer recording has been set.  
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has  
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)  
2 3 (page 98)  
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is  
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).  
NTSC  
Lights when playing NTSC format video.  
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is  
loaded.  
(page 95)  
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast  
are recorded.  
(page 94)  
Lights when the component video output is set to  
progressive scan.  
OVER (page 95)  
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.  
5
Recording quality indicators (page 38)  
XP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best  
quality).  
SP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP  
(standard play).  
LP / SLP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long  
play) or SLP (super long play).  
EP / SEP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP  
(extended play) or SEP (super extended play).  
MN  
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN  
(manual recording level) mode.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to choose a language, then  
press ENTER.  
Switching on and setting up  
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you  
can make several basic settings using the Setup  
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the  
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output settings.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock Language  
Inpu
Tuner  
English  
français  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Powe
Help  
Deutsch  
Español  
Svenska  
Italiano  
Nederlands  
PyccK N N  
Setup
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly  
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting  
to use the recorder.  
4
Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup  
Navigator.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
Initial Setup  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
Basic  
Clock
Complete this setup before you  
Inpu
INPUT SELECT  
Tuner  
start using your recorder.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Help  
Start  
Cancel  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
CHANNEL  
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press ꢁ  
to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup  
Navigator.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
5
Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press  
ENTER.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
Initial Setup  
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this  
Basic  
Clock AutoChannel Setting  
Inpu
Tuner  
recorder.  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Help  
Auto Scan  
Download from TV  
2
Press the ꢇ STANDBY/ON button on the remote  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Do not Set  
control or the front panel to switch on.  
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should  
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup  
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the  
Initial Setup menu; see page 92).  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the  
channels (because they have already been set up, for  
example).  
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using  
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will  
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen  
size and language information. (Check the manual  
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)  
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if  
you connected this recorder to your TV using a  
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the  
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this  
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for  
more details).  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
•
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to choose your country,  
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After  
you see that the time has been set, select Next to  
proceed.  
then press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock Country Selection  
Input
PoweCountry  
Help  
Initial Setup  
Tuner  
Basic  
Clock AutoClock Setting  
Inpu
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
UK  
Tuner  
Date  
SAT 01  
11  
/
:
01  
20  
/
2005  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Time  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Help  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Clock Set CH  
Pr  
1
Start  
Next  
•
Auto-tuning channels  
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the  
channel presets.  
If the time could not be set automatically, press  
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
Tuning  
•
Manual clock setting  
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time  
32/213  
Cancel  
signals, you can set the clock manually.  
•
Downloading channels from your TV  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to set your time zone.  
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative  
to GMT.  
Use the Download from TV option to download all the  
channels that your TV is tuned to.  
Downloading  
Pr 5  
32/213  
Initial Setup  
1/2  
Basic  
Clock Manual Clock Setting  
Input
Cancel  
Tuner  
England  
London  
Time Zone  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Help  
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Summer Time  
Off  
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press  
ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
Press ꢁ then use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select ‘On’  
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.  
Select On if you are currently using summer time.  
Basic  
Clock ClockSetting  
Input
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Help  
Auto  
Manual  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Initial Setup  
1/2  
Basic  
Clock Manual Clock Setting  
Input
Tuner  
England  
London  
Time Zone  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Help  
•
Auto clock setting  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup Summer Time  
On  
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together  
with the program. This recorder can use these  
signals to set the clock automatically.  
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then  
press ENTER to make all the settings.  
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number  
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the  
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
2/2  
Basic  
Clock Manual Clock Setting  
Initial Setup  
Tuner  
Input
Date  
SAT 01  
/
:
01  
00  
/
2005  
Basic  
Clock AutoClock Setting  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Tuner  
Input
Help  
Setup
Time Zone  
Time  
00  
Date  
––  
––  
/
:
––  
––  
/
––––  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
England  
London  
Time  
Help  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Clock Set CH  
Pr  
1
Summer Time  
On  
Start  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to change the value in the  
highlighted field.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to move from one field to  
Other settings you can make  
another.  
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be  
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,  
however, that you may want to make a couple of  
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set  
up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.  
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in  
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.  
7
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or  
‘Standard (4:3)’.  
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip  
channels where there is no station, as well as  
manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on  
page 93.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock TVScreen Size  
Input
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Powe
Help  
Wide (16:9)  
Standard (4:3)  
• If for any reason you need to cancel the setup process  
before it’s completed, you will be asked the next time  
you switch on whether you want to start setting up  
again, or whether to leave it until later.  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select, then press ENTER.  
Is your TV compatible with progressive scan  
8
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for  
playback and recording  
video?  
The HDD/DVD button (remote control and front panel) is  
used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for playback  
and recording. The indicator in the front panel display  
shows which is currently selected.  
Initial Setup  
Clock Progressive  
Input
Basic  
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Powe
Help  
Compatible  
Not Compatible  
Setup Don't Know  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select Compatible, Not  
Compatible, or Don’t Know, then press ENTER.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
• Note that progressive scan video is only output  
through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the  
component video outputs.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
9
Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select  
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock
Tuner  
Input Setupis complete!  
PoweEnjoy using your DVD recorder!  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Help  
Finish Setup  
Go Back  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Setup
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
4
Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the  
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the  
disc.  
Making your first recording  
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic  
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a  
recordable DVD.  
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the  
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for  
recording.  
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 5  
(Recording).  
• Blank DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recording out of the box.  
5
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV  
channel you want to record from.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.  
• If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART  
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s  
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel  
your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on  
page 40 for detailed instructions.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
6
Press ì REC to start recording.  
• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)  
mode, which will give you around two hours of  
recording from a blank DVD disc. The different  
recording modes and their recommended uses are  
covered in more detail in the chapter on Recording.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• You can pause recording by pressing ꢆ. Press ìREC  
or ꢆ again to restart recording.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
7
When you want to stop recording, press  
ꢀ STOP REC.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
Playing back your recording  
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD  
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.  
TV DRECT REC  
•
Press ꢅ to start playback.  
If you want to stop playback before the end of the  
DVD RECORDER  
recording, press ꢄ.  
1
If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and  
this recorder.  
Press ꢇ STANDBY/ON to switch on.  
• Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this  
recorder.  
2
Use the HDD/DVD button to select the HDD or  
DVD as the recording destination.  
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.  
3
Press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE (front panel only) to open  
the disc tray.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
• If the NICAM audio setting (see Nicam Select on  
page 94) is set to NICAM and you are watching a  
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM  
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.  
Using the built-in TV tuner  
Changing TV channels  
NICAM  
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note  
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,  
recording or during recording standby.  
Regular  
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also  
select the language.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
NICAM A  
Regular  
NICAM B  
CHANNEL  
NICAM A+B  
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM  
bilingual broadcast.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
A (L)  
B (R)  
ENTER  
A + B (L+R)  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• When watching a recording made from an external  
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External  
Audio on page 94), you can switch the audio channel  
between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).  
• CHANNEL +/– buttons on the remote  
• Number buttons on the remote – For example, to  
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,  
1
press 3, 4, ENTER.  
L
R
L+R  
Changing audio channels  
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or  
external input signal.  
Tip  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording  
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode,  
or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a  
bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide  
which language you want to record before recording  
by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see  
Bilingual Recording on page 95).  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
•
Press AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) to change the audio.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.  
Note  
1. Channel presets are numbered 1–99.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Switching between TV and DVD  
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can  
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in  
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),  
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV  
mode’).  
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-  
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV  
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD (SHIFT + INPUT  
SELECT) mode setting.  
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV  
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.  
STANDBY/ON  
HDD/DVD  
ꢇ
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
•
Press TV/DVD (SHIFT + INPUT SELECT) to switch  
between TV mode and DVD mode.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Basic playback  
04  
1
Press ꢇ STANDBY/ON to switch on.  
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the  
correct video input.  
This section shows you how to use your recorder for  
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of  
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as  
repeat and program play, are covered in Playback on  
page 53.  
2
Press HDD/DVD to select either the HDD or the  
DVD for playback.  
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.  
3
Press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE (front panel only) to open  
the disc tray.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
4
Load a disc.  
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc  
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-  
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to  
play face down).  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read  
the note on page 33.  
5
Press ꢅ to start playback.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc  
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃbuttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc  
menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for  
Video CD menus.  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will  
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
• See the following sections for more details on playing  
specific kinds of discs.  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
6
7
To stop playback, press ꢄ.  
TV DRECT REC  
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject  
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.  
• To open/close the disc tray, press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE  
(front panel). Remove the disc before putting the  
recorder into standby.  
Important  
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means  
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a  
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it  
is specified.  
• Press ꢇ STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into  
standby.  
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback  
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This  
is not a malfunction.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Playing DVD discs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.  
Playing from the HDD  
The table below shows the basic playback controls when  
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).  
Press to start playback.  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
Playback automatically stops after the end  
of a title is reached.  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing ꢅ. (Press ꢄ again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing ꢅ. (Press ꢄ again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a  
chapter number then press ENTER to skip  
directly to that chapter within the currently  
playing title.  
On some discs, you can also use the num-  
ber buttons to select numbered items in  
During playback, enter a title number then  
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
ENTER  
the disc menu.  
ENTER  
VR mode only: During playback, enter a  
title number then press ENTER.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry  
and start again.  
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips  
backward/forward progressively up to a  
maximum of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
SHIFT  
BACK CM SKIP  
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips  
backward/forward progressively up to a  
SHIFT  
maximum of ten minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
BACK CM SKIP  
While paused, press and hold to start  
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
While paused, press and hold to start  
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video  
disc.  
TOP  
MENU  
MENU  
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-  
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select  
items.  
ENTER  
Press to return to the previous level of a  
DVD-Video disc menu.  
RETURN  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
Video CD/Super VCDs.  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
1
audio CDs , and WMA/MP3 files.  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)  
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you  
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you  
Press to start playback.  
2
can select what to watch.  
Press to stop playback.  
Press to start playback.  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from the place last  
stopped.  
Press to start scanning. Press again to  
increase the scanning speed. (There are  
two scan speeds; the current scan speed  
is shown on-screen.)  
Press to stop playback.  
Video CD only: You can resume playback  
from the same point by pressing ꢅ. (Press  
ꢄ again to cancel the resume function.)  
Press to skip to previous/next track (or  
folder for WMA/MP3 disc).  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to  
display the previous/next page.  
ENTER  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
ENTER  
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,  
use to select numbered menu items.  
Video CD only: Each press skips backward/  
SHIFT  
forward progressively up to a maximum of  
ten minutes forward or three minutes  
BACK CM SKIP  
back. Note that this function doesn’t work  
when playing in PBC mode.  
While paused, press and hold to start  
ꢋ
ꢊ
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed (forward only).  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame (forward only).  
Press to display the disc menu of a Video  
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.  
RETURN  
Note  
1. If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise  
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) button (see Switching audio  
channels on page 61).  
2. When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video  
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing ꢍ to start playback instead of ꢅ.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Using the Home Menu  
Displaying disc information on-  
screen  
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the  
features of the recorder.  
You can display various on-screen information about the  
disc loaded or the HDD.  
Note that some options in the Home Menu may be  
grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not  
available at the present time. For example, the  
Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc  
loaded that contains JPEG image files.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu screen:  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
Disc Navigator  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Photo Viewer  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
Jukebox  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select  
the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press  
HOME MENU.  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TOP  
MENU  
TV DRECT REC  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
DVD RECORDER  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
1
Press DISPLAY (SHIFT + HELP) repeatedly to  
Home menu options  
display/change the on-screen information.  
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the  
status of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable disc).  
Disc Navigator (page 54, Disc Setup (page 87)  
page 73)  
Timer Recording  
(page 42)  
Initial Setup (page 92)  
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after  
150 minutes.  
Play Mode (page 57)  
Video/Audio Adjust  
(page 89)  
2
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY  
(SHIFT + HELP) repeatedly until it disappears.  
The example displays below are a guide only; actual  
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.  
Copy (page 63)  
Photo Viewer (page 85)  
Jukebox (page 82)  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
5
Recording time remaining  
HDD and removable disc activity display  
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in  
the current recording mode.  
Press DISPLAY (SHIFT + HELP) once to see the HDD and  
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD  
button to switch between the two kinds of display.  
6
Preset name and number  
The example displays below show high-speed copying  
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.  
Shows the preset name and preset number for the  
currently selected channel.  
7
Audio mode  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel  
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Hi-Speed Copy  
0h08m left  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
8
Copy control information  
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel  
program.  
9
Disc name  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
Shows the disc name.  
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD  
audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
10 Finalized  
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.  
11 TV/DVD mode  
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching  
Recording time  
between TV and DVD on page 30).  
Relative playback position  
Stop display 2  
Stop display 1  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ꢄStop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
ꢄStop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Resume  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
14:52 MON 15/11/2004  
Rem. 0h35m  
Titles  
Lock Disc  
:
Original 99  
: On  
Play List 15  
Disc Name  
: Comedy shows  
DVD Mode  
TV Mode  
9 10  
11  
1
2
Date and time  
Number of titles/tracks on disc  
1
DVD-RW Original / Play List  
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback  
is currently set to Original or Play List.  
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play  
List titles are shown separately.  
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows  
Copy List.  
2
Disc type and mode  
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),  
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR  
or Video).  
3
Recording mode and time  
Shows the current recording mode (XP, SP, LP, etc.), and  
the total recording time of the disc.  
4
Resume  
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last  
place stopped.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Play display 1  
Recording display  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
ìRec  
DVD-R Video  
3
0. 00. 15  
22:00  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
ꢅPlay  
DVD-R Video Chapters 15  
Title Total 0. 11. 52  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
21:00  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
–
Rem.  
0h35m  
DVD Mode  
DVD Mode  
1
2
Number of chapters in title  
5
Current title and chapter number  
1
2
3
Current title number  
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for  
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG  
disc, shows current folder and file.)  
Elapsed recording time  
Timer recording start and stop times  
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is  
a timer recording.  
3
Elapsed title time  
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track  
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)  
4
Remaining recording time available  
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current  
recording mode.  
4
5
Total running time of title  
Angle indicator  
5
Recording mode  
Lights during multi-angle scenes.  
Shows the current recording mode (XP, SP, LP, etc.), and  
the total recording time of the disc.  
Play display 2  
1
2
3
4
5
Tip  
• When using the simultaneous play and record  
feature, the display shows information for playback  
only.  
ꢅPlay  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21  
Chapter Total 0. 01. 52  
ꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆꢆ  
4.32Mbps  
Hi-Speed Copy  
Title Name  
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback  
information is displayed.  
: 21/11 Football match  
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a  
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.  
1
Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,  
copy, disc back-up  
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in  
progress.  
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis  
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the  
displayed record setting.  
2
3
4
Elapsed chapter time  
Total running time of chapter  
Data transfer rate  
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are  
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This  
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV  
broadcasts versus DVD.  
1
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.  
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time  
display when the disc is paused.  
5
Copy protected material (!)  
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.  
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear  
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that  
the broadcast TV program contains copy control  
information.  
Note  
1.Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
CRhaepcteor 5rding  
About DVD recording  
About HDD recording  
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW  
media. The main difference between the two is that  
DVD-R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW  
can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.  
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very  
flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality  
options, including manual mode, and of course you can  
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.  
Both types of disc can be initialized for Video mode or VR  
mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends  
on what you want to do with the recording which mode  
you choose.  
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can  
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher  
quality recording modes.  
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,  
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,  
and changing the way the video is presented.  
Important  
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that  
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99  
respectively. No more recording is possible on the  
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been  
reached.  
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but  
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard  
1
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).  
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all  
recording on that disc will be in that mode.  
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title  
is 12 hours.  
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on  
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure  
that the Input Line System setting (page 99) matches  
the TV line system of the source you’re recording.  
Important  
• The maximum number of titles and chapters that can  
be recorded on a VR mode disc is 99 and 999  
respectively; on a Video mode disc the maximum  
number of titles and chapters is 99 and 99. No more  
recording is possible on a disc that already contains  
the maximum number of chapters/titles.  
HDD Video mode compatibility  
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in  
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD  
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 97).  
• Unfinalized Video mode discs are not usable in other  
DVD recorders. Likewise, unfinalized video mode  
discs recorded using other recorders are not usable  
in this recorder.  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from  
HDD to Video mode DVD is possible. When recording a  
bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to  
record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual  
Recording on page 95).  
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure  
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the  
recorder.  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,  
high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, both  
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you  
can switch the audio on playback.  
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can  
affect playback and/or recording performance.  
Please take proper care of your discs.  
• See also Disc / content format playback compatibility  
on page 9 for detailed disc compatibility information.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,  
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line  
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and  
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also  
Additional information about the TV system settings  
on page 99.  
Note  
1.Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for  
VR mode compatibility information.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Recording time and picture quality  
There are six preset recording quality modes :  
Restrictions on video recording  
1
You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs  
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material  
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause  
automatically and an error message will be displayed on-  
screen.  
• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most  
applications, gives about two hours of recording time  
on a DVD.  
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on the  
HDD or in VR mode (see below).  
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but  
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four  
hours.  
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external  
input, you can display copy control information on  
screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on  
page 34).  
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives  
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.  
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but  
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
CPRM  
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed  
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs.  
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable  
Media.  
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but  
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
Please note that there is a trade-off between recording  
time and quality. The longer the possible recording time,  
the lower the recorded picture quality.  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that  
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you  
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible  
DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or  
higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on the HDD.  
In addition to these settings, when Manual Recording is  
On (see Manual Recording on page 97) you can access 32  
different recording quality/time settings (MN1–MN32), a  
high-quality audio mode (LPCM), and a super-high  
quality (data transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) HDD  
recording mode (XP+).  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that  
are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,  
AUTO, which maximizes the recording quality for the  
space available on the disc loaded at the time of  
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality  
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.)  
Recording equipment and copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful  
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is  
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a  
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or  
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception  
or consented to by the rightowners.  
Recorded audio  
• This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other  
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two  
channel Dolby Digital format. When set to LPCM, sound  
is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM  
format.  
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording  
in Video mode or to the HDD with the HDD Recording  
Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting,  
use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 95) to select  
the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording  
starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual  
broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on  
playback.  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Note  
1.All recording times (both in this manual and those shown by the recorder) are approximate. This is because of the way that the video is re-  
corded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what you’re recording.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Setting the picture quality/recording  
time  
Basic recording from the TV  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.  
Recording starts immediately and continues until the  
disc is full or you stop the recording.  
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set  
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard  
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance  
between picture quality and recording time.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual  
Recording on page 97), a further option will be available  
(MN1–32, LPCM or XP+, depending on what you set).  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
See also Recording time and picture quality on page 38 for  
more information.  
CHANNEL  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
ENTER  
TV DRECT REC  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
•
Press REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) repeatedly to select  
a recording setting.  
• XP – High quality  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
• SP – Standard play  
• LP – Long play  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
• EP – Extended play  
• SLP – Super Long play  
• SEP – Super Extended play  
1
Use the HDD/DVD button to select the HDD or a  
recordable DVD for recording.  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if  
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder  
takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
1
2
• MN / LPCM / XP+ – Manual / Linear PCM / XP+  
(available only when manual recording is on)  
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV  
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and  
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a  
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is  
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting  
(see On-Screen Display on page 98) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
channel to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel number:  
Channel preset  
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the  
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.  
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,  
press 2, 4 then ENTER)  
3
Use the REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) button to set the  
picture quality/recording time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above  
for detailed instructions.  
Note  
1.Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio chan-  
nel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 95).  
2.Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are  
always copied in real time.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
4
Use the AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) button to select the  
Direct recording from TV  
audio channel to record.  
See Changing audio channels on page 29 for more on  
this.  
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART  
cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can  
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV  
without having to worry about what channel preset the  
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with  
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this  
feature.  
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is  
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing  
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The  
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set  
to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the  
audio channel before recording.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
5
Press ì REC to start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC  
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30  
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The  
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the  
front panel display. When the recording ends, the  
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other  
operation is being performed.  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
TV DRECT REC  
DVD RECORDER  
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.  
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press  
ꢆ. Press again to restart the recording. (If recording  
to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started  
after recording restarts)  
1
2
If necessary, load a recordable disc.  
Set the picture quality/recording time using the  
REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) button.  
3
Press TV DIRECT REC (SHIFT + ì REC) to start  
6
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.  
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you  
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ  
STOP REC.  
recording.  
If you want to set a recording time, press the ì REC  
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30  
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You  
can see the recording time on-screen and in the front  
panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder  
automatically switches into standby if no other operation  
is being performed.  
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no  
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of  
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).  
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.  
Tip  
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press  
ꢆ. Press again to restart the recording. (If recording  
to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started  
after recording restarts)  
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop  
through function. During recording, press the front  
panel ꢃ button to switch to SCART THRU (loop  
through on), or ꢂ to switch to SCART NORM (loop  
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through  
on if recording from the AV2/AUTO START  
REC(INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV  
4
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.  
• If you set the recording time in step 3, you can still  
stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ STOP REC.  
connectors. Also, loop through is automatically reset  
to off after recording has finished.  
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no  
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of  
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).  
Tip  
• You can press TV DIRECT REC (SHIFT + ì REC)  
while the recorder is in standby to switch on and  
immediately start recording.  
• Please note that you can’t record from another  
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART  
cable to the AV2/AUTO START REC(INPUT 1/  
DECODER) connector using the TV Direct Recording  
feature.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Important  
Setting a timer recording  
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32  
timer programs waiting to be recorded.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
• Timer recording will not start if:  
– The recorder is already recording.  
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.  
Using the timer recording features you can program up  
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer  
recording programs can be set to record just once, every  
day, or every week.  
• Timer recording will start when the operation  
preventing timer recording has finished.  
There are three ways to program a timer recording; using  
the Easy Timer Recording feature (see Easy Timer  
Recording below), using the VIDEO Plus+ programming  
system (see Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus+®  
programming system on page 43), or using manual timer  
recording (see Setting a manual timer recording on  
page 44).  
• If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support  
simultaneous playback and recording (see  
Simultaneous recording and playback on page 48) is  
playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,  
playback will automatically stop to allow the  
recording to start.  
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording  
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the  
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the  
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if  
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if  
recording to HDD).  
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel  
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is  
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)  
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not  
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that  
the HDD is not recordable).  
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable  
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)  
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you  
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to  
automatically replace the previous timer recording with  
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the  
previous recording made on that timer program will be  
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have  
watched it yet or not.  
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording  
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording  
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use  
some functions.  
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to  
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title  
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12  
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there  
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds  
between titles.  
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc  
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set  
(see Optimized Rec on page 97 for more on this).  
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the  
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will  
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets  
the best recording quality for the space available on  
the disc loaded at the time of recording.  
Easy Timer Recording  
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes  
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.  
• HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets  
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank  
DVD disc.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
• Use the HDD/DVD button to select DVD or HDD to  
record to DVD or the HDD respectively.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
3
Use ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the cursor to the  
CHANNEL  
recording start date and time on the grid.  
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at  
a time using the ꢈ and ꢉ buttons.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
Current time  
TOP  
MENU  
Recording start time  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
Easy Timer Recording  
RETURN  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
14:00  
ꢋ
ꢊ
1/01  
2/01  
3/01  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
SAT  
1/01 11:45 – ––:––  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
+ –  
CHANNEL  
/
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
Pr 7  
SP  
HDD  
TV DRECT REC  
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer  
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is  
a 15 minute interval.  
1
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Timer Recording’,  
then ‘Easy Timer’.  
The darker area represents time that has already passed  
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time  
that’s available.  
Disc Navigator  
Disc Setup  
4
Press ENTER to set the start time.  
Initial Setup  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Copy  
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the  
screen.  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Photo Viewer  
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need  
to by pressing RETURN.  
Jukebox  
5
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ to move the cursor to the  
2
Set the TV channel and recording quality.  
recording end time on the grid.  
Recording start time  
Easy Timer Recording  
Recording end time  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
14:00  
1/01  
2/01  
3/01  
Easy Timer Recording  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
14:00  
15:00  
16:00  
17:00  
1/01  
2/01  
3/01  
SAT  
1/01  
9:30 – ––:––  
+ –  
CHANNEL  
/
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
Pr 7  
SP  
HDD  
SAT  
1/01  
11:45 – 13:45  
+ –  
/
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to set the channel you  
CHANNEL  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
Pr 7  
SP  
HDD  
want to record.  
• Use the REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) button to set the  
recording quality. Press repeatedly to switch between  
XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP and AUTO (and MN if  
manual recording mode is on).  
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow  
stretches from the start time to the current cursor  
position, representing the length of the recording. A  
recording of up to six hours can be set.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
6
7
Press ENTER to set the end time.  
1
Press ‘VIDEO Plus+ (SHIFT + MENU)’ to display  
the VIDEO Plus+ program screen.  
You can also access this screen from the Home Menu  
(press HOME MENU, select Timer Recording, then  
VIDEO Plus+).  
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or  
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.  
Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus+®  
programming system  
PlusCode#  
This system makes programming timer recordings very  
simple. Most TV guides publish PlusCode programming  
numbers with their program details. If you want to make  
a timer recording of a program, you just input the  
corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel  
settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell  
the recorder the recording mode, and whether it’s a  
once-only recording or a regular recording.  
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
3
6
9
Cancel  
Enter  
Clear  
• Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode  
programming number. (To clear the last digit  
entered, press CLEAR.)  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
• You can also use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select  
digits from the on-screen display.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
2
After making the settings, select ‘Enter’ and  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
press ENTER.  
The timer recording screen appears with the timer  
CHANNEL  
program you just set.  
3
Confirm that the settings are correct.  
If the channel number isn't displayed, use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to highlight CH, then use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to set  
the correct channel number.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
VIDEO Plus+  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
• If the channel number is set, but incorrectly, set up  
the guide channel (see Set VIDEO Plus+ CH on  
page 93).  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
4
Select ‘Store Program’ to finish.  
• Other options in the same menu panel allow you to  
name the program, and change the recording  
destination and/or recording mode.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
DVD RECORDER  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it means that  
although you entered a valid number, the program  
has already finished.  
VIDEO Plus+ programming with the power  
off  
You can enter a PlusCode programming number when  
the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is  
always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD  
disc, you’ll need to switch on the power and use the full  
VIDEO Plus+ program screen.  
Setting a manual timer recording  
The timer recording screen you can see all the timer  
programs already set, clear programs and set up new  
ones.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
TOP  
MENU  
MENU  
CHANNEL  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
VIDEO Plus+  
MENU  
ꢋ
ꢊ
TOP  
MENU  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ST0P REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
REC  
TV DRECT REC  
ꢋ
ꢊ
1
Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
screen.  
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from  
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer  
Recording, then Timer Recording).  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
This screen shows all the timer programs currently set.  
Important  
Timer Program View  
Tmr Pgms 4/32  
OK  
SAT 26/3 15:00  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
SAT 26/3 18:00 – 21:00  
World Journey  
• You can’t use this feature until you have set up the  
guide channels. See Set VIDEO Plus+ CH on page 93.  
Pr 10  
Pr 4  
OK  
SUN 27/3 19:30 – 21:00  
Flower  
Until 30/4  
• You can’t change the recording mode.  
MON – FRI 13:30 – 14:00  
Pr 8  
New Input  
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer recordings.  
1
Press ’VIDEO Plus+ (SHIFT + MENU)’.  
The front panel display shows the current recording  
mode and prompts you to enter the PlusCode  
programming number.  
HDD Remain  
DVD Remain  
59h59m(SP)  
1h59m(SP)  
• Each row is for one timer recording program, with the  
date and time information, channel, recording mode,  
DVD or HDD and recording status.  
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and  
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown  
towards the bottom of the screen.  
2
Use the number buttons to enter the number.  
• In the upper-right corner, the number of timer  
programs already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms.  
• To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR.  
• If there are more than five timer programs already  
set, press ꢍto switch page (go back using the ꢌ  
button).  
3
Press ENTER.  
The display shows the timer settings:  
Date ꢄ Start time ꢄ End time ꢄ HDD and Recording  
channel ꢄ Recording mode.  
• You can also delete a timer program before it’s  
started (before the recorder enters timer recording  
standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See  
also Deleting a timer program on page 46.  
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that  
the number is correct and that the guide channel is  
set (see Set VIDEO Plus+ CH on page 93), then set  
the timer recording again.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
2
Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer program,  
• OK – Can be recorded.  
then press ENTER.  
• Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the  
recording won’t finish).  
Timer Program Set  
• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set  
(when recording to the HDD the recording will be  
split into two titles).  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
CH  
Pr 10  
Date  
SAT 26/3  
Start  
18:00  
Stop  
21:00  
Extend  
30 min  
Store Program  
• Overlap – Two timer programs partially or  
completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take  
priority.  
Detailed Settings  
Record To  
Recording Mode  
Auto Replace Rec.  
Genre  
Enter Details  
HDD  
XP  
On  
No Category  
A/L  
Set Detailed  
Set Title Name  
Cancel  
Bilingual Recording  
HDD Recording Format Video Mode On  
• Until ... (eg., Until 13/8) – For a regular recording,  
the last program that could be recorded is shown.  
• Data Over –Can’t record because the disc  
management area of the disc is full.  
3
Enter the timer recording settings.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a field; use the ꢀ/ꢁ  
buttons to change the value.  
• Cancel Once – A regular timer program is set to skip.  
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record for some reason.  
• CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1–Pr 99, excluding skip  
channels), or one of the external inputs from which to  
record.  
• Title Over – Can’t record because there is already  
the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999;  
DVD: 99).  
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or  
select a daily or weekly program.  
• Recording – The program is currently recording.  
• Standby – The recorder is in timer recording  
standby.  
• Start – Set the recording start time.  
• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length  
of a timer recording is 24 hours).  
• nothing displayed – Another timer recording or  
copying is in progress.  
4
If you want to change the recording mode,  
recording destination, etc., select ‘Set Detailed’.  
In this area you can set:  
6
To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME  
MENU.  
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD  
for DVD recording. Select HDD for Auto Replace  
Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only).  
Tip  
• To enter a title name for the timer recording in  
advance, select Set Title Name and follow the on-  
screen display.  
Recording Mode – Select XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP or SEP,  
(See Setting the picture quality/recording time on  
page 39). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also  
select the LPCM or XP+ setting, or MN (press ENTER  
then use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the level).  
Note  
Replace – Auto Replace Recording: automatically erases  
the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one  
is recorded.  
• If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no  
recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded  
doesn’t have enough free space for the complete  
recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless  
you load a suitable disc before the recording actually  
starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording.  
(The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are  
already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough  
free space on the HDD for recording.)  
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only).  
Bilingual – Select which channel of a bilingual broadcast  
to record (necessary if recording to a Video mode DVD or  
to the HDD with the HDD Rec Mode set to Video Mode  
On).  
HDD Recording Format – Select Video Mode On or  
Video Mode Off depending on whether you need high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD capabillity or not.  
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see  
Optimized Rec on page 97) is set to On, the recorder  
will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the  
recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto  
the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the  
Recovery Recording feature will automatically make  
the recording to the HDD instead.  
5
After entering all the timer recording  
information, highlight ‘Store Program’ and press  
ENTER.  
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The  
timer program you just input appears in the list. The  
rightmost column shows various timer recording status  
messages:  
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an  
Auto Replace Recording may not complete  
successfully.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed  
copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to  
start, the new timer recording will not replace the old  
one. However, the next time the timer recording  
starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.  
Extending a timer recording in progress  
You can extend a timer recording beyond the  
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be  
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
Editing a timer program  
You can change any of the settings in a timer program  
before the recording is due to start.  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
RETURN  
2
Highlight the timer program you want to  
ꢋ
ꢊ
change.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Modify’ from the command  
menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
TV DRECT REC  
The Timer Program Set screen appears from which you  
can edit the settings.  
4
Edit the timer recording settings as necessary.  
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks  
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for  
5
Select ‘Store Program’ to finish.  
1
Confirm the settings you made from the following screen.  
three seconds.  
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel  
display.  
Deleting a timer program  
You can delete timer programs you no longer need.  
2
Press ì REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30  
1
2
3
Press TIMER REC.  
minute increments.  
Highlight the timer program you want to erase  
Press ꢃ then select ‘Erase’ from the command  
.
Programming a new end time  
You can edit the end time of a timer recording you have  
previously set.  
menu panel.  
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
• You can also just press CLEAR when the timer  
program is highlighted.  
2
Highlight the timer program you want to  
change.  
Skipping a regular timer program  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Modify’ from the command  
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer program, you  
can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled  
recording.  
menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
The Timer Program Set screen appears from which you  
can edit the settings.  
1
2
3
Press TIMER REC.  
4
Edit the end time as necessary.  
• You can also edit the Extend time parameter.  
Highlight the timer program you want to skip  
Press ꢃ then select ‘Cancel Once’ from the  
.
5
6
Select ‘Store Program’ then press ENTER.  
command menu panel.  
You can also just press ꢆ when the timer program is  
highlighted.  
To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME  
MENU.  
• In the timer program list, Cancel Once appears by  
the program.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in  
progress  
Timer recording FAQ  
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the  
program (but continue recording), or stop recording  
completely if you need to.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start  
recording!  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not  
locked (see Lock Disc on page 87), and that there are  
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why  
not?  
DVD RECORDER  
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.  
1
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for  
• What happens when two or more timer programs  
overlap?  
three seconds.  
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator  
disappears); recording continues so that you can  
manually stop recording whenever you like.  
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start  
time has priority. However, the recorder will start  
recording the program with the later start time after  
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have  
the same times, only one of them will be recorded, so  
it is best to set one of them to Cancel Once. See  
Skipping a regular timer program on page 46.  
2
When you want to stop recording completely,  
press ꢀ STOP REC.  
Tip  
• You can also stop a timer recording immediately by  
pressing ꢀ STOP REC then selecting Yes to confirm.  
Preventing use of the recorder before a  
timer recording (child lock)  
You can make all the front panel and remote control  
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is  
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make  
sure that the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.  
2
Press and hold ꢄ on the front panel for three  
seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons  
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly  
displayed again.  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢄ on the front  
panel for three seconds until the display shows  
UNLOCK.  
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is  
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then  
press and hold ì REC for three seconds.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback  
Recording from an external  
component  
VR mode  
HDD  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a  
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the  
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For  
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of  
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start  
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the  
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.  
You can record from an external component, such as a  
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s  
external inputs.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording  
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the  
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator  
screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD on page 54).  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
Important  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or  
Ver. 1.2 disc to be able to use this feature.  
TOP  
MENU  
• You may not be able to use this feature with a  
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another  
recorder.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• Chase playback is not possible using a VR mode  
DVD-R disc.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
•
During recording, press ꢅ to start playback from  
1
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
the beginning of the current recording , or press  
DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play  
from there.  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as  
2
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.  
• To stop playback, press ꢄ (recording will continue).  
DVD RECORDER  
• To stop recording, press ꢀ STOP REC (playback will  
continue).  
1
Make sure that the component you want to  
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you  
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD  
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match  
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also  
Additional information about the TV system settings  
on page 99). Also, during simultaneous recording  
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback  
track/title changes then playback will automatically  
stop.  
record from is connected properly to the DVD  
recorder.  
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.  
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of  
the external inputs to record from.  
There are three analog inputs and a DV digital input. The  
current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel  
display:  
3
• AV2/L1 – Input 1  
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)  
• L3 – Input 3  
• DV – DV input (front panel)  
Note  
1.You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.  
2.When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning discs on page 56).  
3.This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 94).  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,  
Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them  
(see Audio In Settings on page 94).  
• Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start  
Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer  
recording is due to start. After the timer recording  
has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume.  
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or  
stretched), adjust on the source component or your  
TV before recording.  
1
Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other  
component), then switch it into standby (if  
necessary).  
Check the manual that came with the receiver if you’re  
not sure how to do this.  
3
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) to set the recording  
quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time  
on page 39 for detailed information.  
2
Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for ‘External  
• Use the HDD/DVD button to select the HDD or DVD  
for recording.  
Audio’ and ‘Bilingual Recording’ are as you want  
them.  
See Audio In Settings on page 94 for more on these  
settings.  
4
Press ì REC when you’re ready to start  
recording.  
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN  
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also  
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.  
3
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) to set the recording  
quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time  
on page 39 for detailed information.  
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,  
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on  
video recording on page 38 for more details.  
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer Recording’,  
then ‘Auto Start Recording’.  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or  
‘No’ to switch off.  
6
Switch the recorder into standby.  
Automatic recording from a satellite  
tuner  
The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights.  
The recorder will automatically switch on and start  
recording when the other component comes on.  
Recording stops when the external component switches  
off.  
HDD  
If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top  
box connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/  
DECODER) input, you can have the recorder start and  
stop recording automatically with the timer settings of  
the connected component. (If the other component  
doesn’t have a built-in timer, you’ll need to use it with an  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press ꢇ STANDBY/  
ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO  
indicator goes off.  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has  
already started, press ì REC for three seconds (this  
cancels Auto Start Recording, but recording  
1
external timer unit.)  
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder  
starts recording when it detects a signal from the other  
component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops  
recording.  
continues), then ꢀ STOP REC to stop recording.  
• You can also stop recording by pressing ꢀSTOP REC  
then selecting Yes to confirm.  
If you want to use this recorder with the timer features of  
your satellite tuner, see Language code list on page 108.  
Tip  
• Alternatively, with no OSD displayed, press and hold  
the front panel ꢀ STOP REC button for more than  
three seconds to switch Auto Start Recording on  
directly. After switching on, switch the recorder into  
standby (step 6).  
Important  
• It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and  
start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear  
this in mind when setting the timer.  
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if  
another timer recording is in progress.  
Note  
1.You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:  
– the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby.  
– the HDD is not recordable.  
– the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999).  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Important  
Recording from a DV camcorder  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this  
recorder’s remote.  
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the  
DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the  
recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder  
and this recorder.  
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,  
you cannot control the second unit from this one.  
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a  
component connected to the DV IN jack.  
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the  
DV IN jack is setup (see DV Input on page 95).  
• You can’t record date and time information from DV  
cassette.  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or  
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will  
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is  
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will  
stop recording and the camcorder should stop  
(depending on the camcorder).  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
• For best results when recording from a DV  
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing  
the camcorder to the place you want to start  
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-  
pause.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
1
Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to  
ENTER  
the front panel DV IN jack.  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
2
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) to set the recording  
quality. See Setting the picture quality/recording time  
on page 39 for detailed information.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
COPY  
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to  
record to DVD.  
TV DRECT REC  
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV  
audio input is setup as you require.  
See DV Input on page 95 for more on this.  
DVD RECORDER  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External  
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want  
them (see Audio In Settings on page 94).  
4
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘DV  
Record’ from the menu.  
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder  
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or ‘Record to  
DVD’ to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable  
DVD respectively.  
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you  
want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point from which  
you want to record.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this  
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the  
ꢄ , ꢅ , ꢆ , ꢈ , ꢉ , ꢎ/ꢋ and ꢊ/ꢏ buttons.  
Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players  
7
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Start Rec’ and  
press ENTER.  
VR mode Video mode  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs  
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including  
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs  
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will  
not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-  
ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to  
(finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that  
came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will  
play.  
ꢄStop  
1.02.22  
ꢄStop  
Control with these  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
buttons  
ꢈ
ꢆ
ꢅ
ꢄ
ꢉ
ꢋ
ꢊ
HDD  
Rem.  
SP (2h00m/DVD)  
32h45m  
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is  
created from which you can select titles when you play  
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title  
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.  
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder  
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.  
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-  
protected signal.  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,  
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then  
using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ followed by ENTER to select titles  
and start playback.  
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting  
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.  
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote  
control during recording.  
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,  
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not  
be recorded. Use the pause button on your  
camcorder instead and recording will start  
immediately.  
Finalizing a disc  
VR mode Video mode  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
• HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker  
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode  
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is  
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.  
2
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after  
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you  
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc  
Name on page 87 before starting the steps below.  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording  
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.  
• See also DV-related messages on page 106 if you  
encounter an error while using the DV IN jack.  
Important  
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,  
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.  
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe  
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 88 for how to do  
this.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!  
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also  
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not  
copy-protected.  
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on  
this recorder even after finalizing.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder  
then switch back on.  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before  
proceeding.  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on  
1
page 95) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
Note  
1.If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually  
from the External Audio setting (page 94).  
2.If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional infor-  
mation about the TV system settings on page 99 for how to change the recorder’s setting.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
Select ‘Finalize’.  
Initializing a recordable DVD disc  
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will  
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also  
manually initialize discs for either Video mode recording  
Disc Setup  
Next Screen  
Start  
Basic  
Finalize  
Initialize  
Undo Finalize  
1
or VR mode recording.  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs  
for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 97  
if you want to change the default to Video mode.  
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of  
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode  
recording, you must do it before recording anything else  
on the disc.  
4
Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then  
‘Next Screen’.  
5
For Video mode discs only, select a title menu  
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to  
cancel.  
Important  
The menu you select will be the one that appears when  
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.  
• Initializing a DVD-RW disc will erase everything  
recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc  
that you want to keep!  
Finalize  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in  
a different format if it was originally initialized on an  
older DVD recorder.  
TITLE MENU  
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-  
initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.  
1
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
Select ‘Initialize’  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer  
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.  
These discs will have only a text title menu when  
finalized on this recorder.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Start  
Basic  
VR Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Video Mode  
Optimize HDD  
6
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.  
During finalization:  
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW disc is going  
to take more than around four minutes, you can  
press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before  
completion, the option to cancel disappears.  
3
Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the  
initialize options.  
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R  
disc.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.  
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of  
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the  
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR  
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc  
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.  
Initializing Disc  
Pr 1  
1 min left  
Note  
1.If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
CPhlaapteyr b6 ack  
Introduction  
Navigating discs and the HDD  
Most of the features described in this chapter make use  
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/  
ꢃand ENTER. To go back one level from any screen, use  
the RETURN button. Remember also that the button  
guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons  
do what.  
ALL  
During playback you can easily jump to another title,  
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on  
the remote.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the  
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3  
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some  
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following  
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which  
instructions you need for which kind of disc.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
DVD  
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW  
TOP  
MENU  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced DVD or finalized  
ENTER  
Video mode DVD-R/RW  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
Video mode  
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)  
VR mode  
VR mode DVD-R/RW  
DVD-Video Video mode  
HDD  
HDD  
1
During playback use the number buttons to  
enter a chapter number within the current title.  
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24,  
press 2, then 4.  
CD  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
Video CD  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
Super VCD  
Super VCD  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
MP3  
WMA or MP3 files  
will jump to the new chapter.  
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback  
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This  
is not a malfunction.  
HDD  
VR mode  
1
During playback, use the number buttons to  
input a title number.  
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,  
then 4.  
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as  
making a program list, are not available in PBC  
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by  
pressing ꢍ.  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The  
PhotoViewer on page 85.  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new title.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
• You can change the thumbnail picture displayed for  
a title; see Set Thumbnail on page 76.  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
MP3  
1
During playback, use the number buttons to  
4
To play the highlighted title, press ENTER.  
• You can also select Play from the command menu  
options.  
input a track number.  
For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,  
then 4.  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
Tip  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Use the time search feature to find a particular point  
on a DVD or within a title on the HDD. See Search  
Mode on page 57 for more information.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new track.  
Changing the display style of the Disc  
Navigator  
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in  
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by  
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose  
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the  
same time.  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse  
the contents of a disc.  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc  
and start playback.  
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD  
1
From the Disc Navigator’s title list, press ꢂ to  
display the view options panel.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
The View Options panel  
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video  
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view  
information on titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Style  
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
See also Editing on page 73 for more on editing  
recordable discs.  
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
Sort order  
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
Recent First  
1
Use the HDD/DVD button to select the hard disk  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Genre  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
drive or DVD.  
All Genres  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
from the on-screen display.  
Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go  
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Style’, ‘Sort  
Order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the  
available view options.  
• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁbuttons to browse up and down the  
list of titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Style  
4
4
Titles  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
Titles  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
8
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Sort
Cancel  
Re
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Recent First  
All Genres  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
Genr
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
1h00m(1.0G)  
A
7
SP  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Remain  
30h30m  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
• Use the ꢌ/ꢍ buttons to display the previous/  
next page of titles, if there are more titles than can fit  
on to the screen.  
• You can change the style and order in which titles are  
displayed from the view options menu. See below for  
more on this.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
• Sort Order – Sort by date (most recent first),  
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest  
first)  
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only  
discs  
DVD-Video  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
MP3  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
from the on-screen display.  
Style  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
Recent first  
New first  
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/  
MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes  
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.  
By title  
Sort
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
By rec.date  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Re
Cancel  
Genr
7
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
A
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Disc Navigator  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Photo Viewer  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
Jukebox  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Style  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres  
No Category  
Free  
Free  
1
2
3
4
5
Sort
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
2
Select what you want to play.  
Re
Free  
Free  
Free  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to highlight items and ENTER to  
select.  
Genr
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
A
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc  
Navigator looks slightly different.  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
• When a DVD is loaded, titles are shown on the left,  
chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter  
within a title.  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select an option, then  
press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to the new  
display preferences.  
1
• When a CD or Video CD/Super VCD is loaded, a list  
of the tracks is displayed.  
4
Press ꢃ to return to the title list.  
• When a WMA/MP3 disc is loaded, a list of folders and  
tracks is displayed (as shown below). Select a folder  
or a track within a folder.  
Disc Navigator  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
Folder (01-03)  
01.Rock  
Track(001-004)  
001.Intro  
CD  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
WMA/MP3  
02.Pop  
002.Escape  
INPUT SELECT  
03.Dance  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and  
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area  
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done  
while the disc is stopped.  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
Note  
1.It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD/Super VCD in PBC mode.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Scanning discs  
Playing in slow motion  
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or  
DVD  
HDD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
1
backward.  
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs  
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in  
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be  
RETURN  
MENU  
ꢋ
ꢊ
3
played forwards in slow motion.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ꢋ
ꢊ
1
During playback, press ꢈ or ꢉ to start  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
reverse or forward scanning.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
2
Press the same button repeatedly to increase the  
scanning speed.  
1
2
During playback, press ꢆ.  
Press and hold ꢎ/ꢋ or ꢊ/ꢏ to start slow  
DVD  
HDD  
motion reverse or forward playback.  
• Forward:  
3
Press the same button repeatedly to change the  
SCAN 1 (1.5x Quick View) ꢄ SCAN 2 ꢄ SCAN 3 ꢄ  
SCAN 4  
slow motion speed.  
SLOW 1/16  
SLOW 1/2  
SLOW 1/8  
SLOW 1/4  
• Reverse:  
2
Reverse play ꢄ SCAN 1 ꢄ SCAN 2 ꢄ SCAN 3  
ꢄ SCAN 4  
4
To resume normal playback, press ꢅ.  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
MP3  
• Forward/Reverse:  
SCAN 1 ꢄ SCAN 2  
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢅ.  
Note  
1.• Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs.  
• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs.  
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output  
from the optical digital output, Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback) No sound is output when using other  
scan speeds.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during  
forward SCAN 1).  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
2.Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth.  
3.• The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played.  
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Play Mode’ to  
display the Play Mode menu screen.  
Frame advance/frame reverse  
Play Mode  
DVD  
HDD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the  
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you  
can only use frame advance.  
Program  
1
RETURN  
MENU  
ꢋ
ꢊ
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to navigate.  
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
Search Mode  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
ALL  
TV DRECT REC  
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a  
2
1
2
During playback, press ꢆ.  
Press ꢎ/ꢋ or ꢊ/ꢏ to back up or advance one  
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/  
folder/track number.  
frame.  
1
2
3
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.  
Select one of the search options.  
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢅ.  
Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/  
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,  
minutes & seconds).  
The Play Mode menu  
ALL  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.00.00  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search  
functions, repeat and program play functions.  
Program  
Important  
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/  
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD  
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions,  
see the following sections.  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes  
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15  
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and  
30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,  
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons.  
CHANNEL  
4
Press ENTER.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
Tip  
TOP  
MENU  
• You can often select what you want to watch on a  
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP  
MENU to display the disc menu.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• Time search doesn’t work with CDs and Super VCDs.  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
Note  
1.• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
2.When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
1
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.  
Select a repeat play mode.  
A-B Repeat  
DVD  
CD  
Video CD  
HDD  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points  
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is  
played over and over.  
Play Mode  
Repeat Disc  
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
1
Program  
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the  
Play Mode menu.  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at  
the point you want the loop to start.  
VR mode  
Play Mode  
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat  
Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).  
A (Loop Start)  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Program  
DVD-Video Video mode  
HDD  
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,  
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat  
Off).  
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will  
automatically move down to B (Loop End).  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
the point you want the loop to end.  
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and  
plays the loop round and round.  
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat  
Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).  
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from  
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be  
in the same title.  
MP3  
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat  
Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).  
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the  
A-B Repeat menu.  
3
To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’  
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play  
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
from the Repeat Play menu.  
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no  
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
Repeat play  
ALL  
There are various repeat play options, depending on the  
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for  
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together  
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the  
2
program list (see Program play on page 59).  
Note  
1.• If you switch camera angles during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.  
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs.  
2.If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
• To add a folder, select the folder.  
Program play  
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press ꢃ  
DVD-Video  
HDD  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
MP3  
and select a track from the list.  
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/  
chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.  
1
Program  
Step  
01.01  
02.  
Folder (01-03)  
01.Rock  
02.Pop  
Track(001-004)  
001.Intro  
002.Escape  
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.  
03.  
04.  
03.Dance  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
2
Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of  
05.  
06.  
program options.  
07.  
08.  
Play Mode  
Input/Edit Program  
Start Program Play  
Cancel Program Play  
Erase Program List  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/  
Program  
track, the step number automatically moves down one.  
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the  
step number where you want to insert another step,  
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move  
down one.  
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the  
kind of disc loaded.  
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a  
list of titles (DVD, HDD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks  
(CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of  
chapters (DVD, HDD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).  
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the  
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.  
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.  
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/  
folders/tracks.  
3
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the  
current step in the program list.  
DVD or HDD: You can add a whole title, or a chapter  
within a title to the program list.  
5
To play the program list, press ꢅ.  
Program play remains active until you turn off program  
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject  
the disc or switch off the recorder.  
• To add a title, select the title.  
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press  
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start  
playback of the program list then select Program  
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see  
Repeat play on page 58).  
ꢃand select a chapter from the list.  
Program  
Step  
01.001  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Title (01-03)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Chapter(001-015)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
Chapter 005  
Chapter 006  
Chapter 007  
Chapter 008  
Title 03  
CD or Video CD/Super VCD: Select a track to add to the  
program list.  
Program  
Step  
01.04  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Track (01-10)  
Track 01  
Track 02  
Track 03  
Track 04  
Track 05  
Track 06  
Track 07  
Track 08  
Total Time 0.00.00  
WMA/MP3: You can add a whole folder, or a track within  
a folder to the program list.  
Note  
1.When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on  
the disc.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Tip  
Displaying and switching subtitles  
DVD-Video  
• To save your program list and exit the program edit  
screen without starting playback, press HOME  
MENU.  
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more  
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which  
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle  
• You can change the program list by selecting Input/  
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.  
1
language during playback.  
• During program play, press ꢍ to skip to the next  
program step.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle  
options.  
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program  
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is  
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program  
list.  
ꢇ
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
Other Program play functions  
CHANNEL  
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can  
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the  
program list from the Play Mode menu.  
1
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Play Mode’, then  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
‘Program’.  
TOP  
MENU  
2
Select a program play function.  
• Input/Edit Program – See above  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved  
program list  
ꢋ
ꢊ
• Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but  
does not erase the program list  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
• Erase Program List – Erases the program list and  
turns off program play  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
1
Press SUBTITLE (SHIFT + 2) repeatedly to select a  
subtitle option.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display.  
Subtitle: 1/2 English  
The toucan lives in tropical forests  
2
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE (SHIFT + 2)  
then CLEAR.  
Note  
1.• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENUto access.  
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 96.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Switching DVD soundtracks  
Switching audio channels  
DVD-Video  
VR mode  
HDD  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more  
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can  
switch the soundtrack during playback.  
MP3  
2
For HDD and VR mode content recorded with bilingual  
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)  
channel, or both (L+R).  
1
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack  
options.  
3
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch  
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right  
channel.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
CLEAR  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these  
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as  
well as individual channels in each.  
CHANNEL  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
CHANNEL  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
ꢋ
ꢊ
TOP  
MENU  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
ꢋ
ꢊ
TV DRECT REC  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
•
Press AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) repeatedly to select an  
ONE TOUCH  
ST0P REC  
audio soundtrack.  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
•
To display/switch the audio channel, press  
AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) repeatedly.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-  
screen.  
Audio : 1/2  
Dolby Digital 2/0CH  
VR mode  
HDD  
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when  
switching soundtracks.  
• L+R – Both channels (default)  
• L – Left channel only  
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS  
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when  
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,  
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/  
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital  
output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on  
page 19 for connection details.  
• R – Right channel only  
CD  
Video CD  
MP3  
• Stereo – Stereo (default)  
• 1/L – Left channel only  
• 2/R – Right channel only  
Note  
1.• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.  
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 96.  
2.Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 97).  
3.When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot  
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital ꢄ PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 95) or listen via the analog outputs  
if you need to switch the audio channel.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Super VCD  
• 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)  
• 1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel  
• 1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel  
• 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo  
• 2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel  
• 2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel  
Switching camera angles  
DVD-Video  
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or  
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be  
marked with a  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon  
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are  
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see  
Angle Indicator on page 98).  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
TV DRECT REC  
•
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE (SHIFT  
+ 3).  
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the  
new angle.  
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while  
repeat playback is active.  
• You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video  
disc menus. Press TOP MENU or MENU to access.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
CChaoptpery7 ing and back-up  
Copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful  
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is  
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a  
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or  
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception  
or consented to by the rightowners.  
Introduction  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to  
a DVD.  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play  
in another player.  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.  
One Touch Copy  
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch  
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title  
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on  
page 63 for detailed instructions.  
* See also Copyright above.  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing  
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or  
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start the copy.  
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a  
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only  
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 64  
for detailed instructions.  
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording  
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in  
whatever recording mode is currently set.  
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at  
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind  
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be  
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum  
copying times on page 102 for more on copying times.  
Make sure that a recordable DVD-R/RW disc is loaded  
when trying to copy from the HDD.  
ONE TOUCH  
ST0P REC  
REC  
COPY  
ì
SHIFT  
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a  
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on  
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is  
always done in real-time.  
TV DRECT REC  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode  
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not  
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at  
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting  
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 97).  
DVD RECORDER  
1
If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, use the  
REC MODE (SHIFT + ꢄ) button to select a recording  
mode.  
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title  
playing will not result in a better quality recording.  
Restrictions on copying  
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means  
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely  
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode  
disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher (see CPRM  
on page 38 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-  
once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and  
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it  
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-  
once protected).  
2
During playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to  
copy the current title.  
The front panel display indicates that the title is being  
copied.  
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the  
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.  
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to  
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the  
title.  
You can identify copy-once protected material during  
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the  
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 36).  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Canceling One Touch Copy  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.  
Using Copy Lists  
* See also Copyright on page 63.  
•
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than  
a second.  
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD  
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to  
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,  
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for  
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not  
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content  
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify  
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the  
actual content is not being altered.  
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is  
erased.  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space  
available for recording does not return to the pre-  
copy figure.  
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy  
Copying to DVD  
Copying from HDD to DVD  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail  
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also  
copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/  
RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied.  
Important  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly  
the same positions as the original when recording on  
to a Video mode disc.  
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System  
setting is changed (see Additional information about  
the TV system settings on page 99).  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a  
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.  
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 111) will erase the  
Copy List.  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be  
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode disc for  
this type of material.  
1
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes ) widescreen  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a  
VR mode disc for this type of material.  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode  
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9–15 modes cannot be  
high-speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use  
a VR mode disc.  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-  
speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR  
mode disc.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
ST0P REC  
REC  
SHIFT  
COPY  
ì
• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD at high-speed.  
TV DRECT REC  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.  
Copying to the HDD  
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.  
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,  
except when copying from a finalized Video mode  
disc.  
Disc Navigator  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for  
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in  
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Photo Viewer  
Jukebox  
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-  
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected  
portions will not be copied.  
Note  
1.In manual recording mode these equate to MN1–15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1–11 (Video Mode On).  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
2
Select ‘HDD ꢄ DVD’.  
5
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight titles you want  
If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 4  
below.  
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to  
the Copy List.  
10 Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Return  
Next  
HDD DVD  
DVD/CD HDD  
Disc Back-up  
DV Record  
Recent first  
All Genres  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
3
If there is already a Copy List stored in the  
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’  
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.  
If you select Use Existing Copy List, skip to step 8 below.  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in  
pink.  
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to  
the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD:  
Copy  
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected  
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.  
Use Existng Copy List  
Create New Cppy List  
• When adding titles that contain material of more  
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a  
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title  
if high-speed copying is possible.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy  
List already stored in the recorder.  
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying may not be  
possible to a Video mode disc.  
4
Select VR mode or Video mode for the copy.  
6
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.  
For certain kinds of material you must use VR mode; for  
greater compatibility with other players, use Video mode.  
The Command Menu panel  
10 Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
Copy  
HDD DVD  
Select Recording Format  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Return  
Please select the recording format for the disc.  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Copying of bilingual broadcasts and  
copy-once protected material  
is possible.  
VR Mode  
Next  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Video Mode  
High compatibility mode. Must be final-  
ized for playback on other equipment.  
19:00  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
Note  
1.• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1–15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1–11 (Video Mode On).  
• LP/MN9–15 recordings when HDD Recording Mode is set to Video Mode Off.  
• Bilingual recordings.  
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.  
• XP+ titles.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.  
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied  
when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see  
page 71).  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
• Cancel – Exit the Copy List screen without saving any  
changes.  
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Return  
Next  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need  
editing.  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
9
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.  
10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢀ/ꢁ  
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
buttons, then press ENTER.  
Return  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
Next  
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 
Erase  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 
Title Name  
Return  
Next  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 
Erase Section  
Move  
Preview  
Copy List Total  
1.2G  
1.2G  
Current DVD Remain  
Cancel  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the  
2h00m(1.0G)  
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 70).  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the  
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a  
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc.  
(The input method is similar to that of naming titles;  
see Title Name on page 67.)  
A menu of editing commands appears:  
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
page 67).  
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List  
(see page 67).  
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a  
1
Video mode DVD after copying. Select a title menu  
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see page 68).  
style from the following screen.  
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see page 68).  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video Mode)  
DVD-RW  
Start Copy  
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List  
HDD  
Return  
(see page 69).  
Recording Mode  
Input Disc Name  
Finalize  
Copy Time 0h00m  
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see  
page 69).  
Recording Mode  
Disc Name  
SP  
Off  
Finalize  
Start Copy  
• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
one (see page 69).  
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title  
(see page 69):  
11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.  
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the  
chapter order.  
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.  
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title  
(see page 70).  
• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy  
(see page 70).  
Note  
1.If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
8
9
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.  
Copying from DVD to HDD  
Important  
Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the  
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 70).  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when  
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you  
can still use the One Touch Copy function (See One  
Touch Copy on page 63).  
10 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.  
Erase  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
Use this command to erase individual titles from the  
Copy List.  
• The Copy List will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or  
edited.  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Play List and  
Original.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 111).  
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to erase.  
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
Erase ?  
!
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that  
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.  
Yes  
No  
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.  
Select ‘DVD/CD ꢄ HDD’.  
Tip  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when  
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing  
ENTER.  
If there is already a Copy List stored in the  
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’  
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy  
List already stored in the recorder.  
Title Name  
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy  
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).  
When copying to a Video mode disc, the name length is  
limited to 40 characters; for a VR mode disc, the limit is  
64 characters.  
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight titles you want  
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to  
the Copy List.  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in  
pink.  
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or  
5
6
7
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.  
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.  
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢀ/ꢁ  
rename).  
2
Select ‘Title Name’ from the command menu  
panel.  
buttons, then press ENTER.  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:  
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
Input Title Name  
page 67).  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see page 68).  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
_
&
~
}
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List  
(see page 69).  
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
© –  
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
–
/2  
/4  
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
• Cancel – Exit the Copy List screen without saving any  
changes.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need  
editing.  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢈ/ꢉ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/  
ꢍ).  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls  
(ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to find the start of the section  
to erase, then press ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
shows the start of the section.  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name on page 76.  
Erase Section (HDD Copy)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
name and return to the Copy List.  
ꢆ Play Pause  
From  
• To return to the main Copy List screen without saving  
To  
changes to the title name, press RETURN.  
Exit  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the  
Erase Section  
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end  
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.  
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List  
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a  
recording made from the TV.  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
1
Highlight the title containing the section you  
press ENTER.  
want to erase.  
Erase ?  
2
Select ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu  
!
panel.  
Yes  
No  
The Erase Section screen appears from which you can  
mark the start and end points of the section to erase.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
3
Select the type of edit.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Move  
Use this command to change the order of titles in the  
Copy List.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
1
Highlight the title you want to move and press  
ENTER.  
2
3
Select ‘Move’ from the command menu panel.  
Move the insert bar to the new position for the  
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
title and press ENTER.  
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
Title to move  
Insertion position  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 74  
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Return  
Next  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Preview  
Combine  
Use this command to check what’s in a title.  
Use this command to make a single title from two titles  
in the Copy List. The second title selected will be  
appended to the first.  
1
Highlight the title you want to preview.  
2
Select ‘Preview’ from the command menu panel.  
1
Highlight the title you want to combine with  
The selected title starts to play. Use any of the usual  
playback controls to scan, skip, play in slow-motion, etc.  
another, then press ENTER.  
This title will not move. The next title you select will be  
appended to this one.  
3
To get back to the Copy List, press RETURN.  
2
3
Select ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel.  
Select the title you want to append to the first,  
Divide  
Use this command to make two titles from a title already  
in the Copy List.  
then press ENTER.  
This title will effectively move to be added to the end of the  
first title. In the example below, title 3 will be appended to  
title 1.  
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to divide.  
Select ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel.  
Select the type of edit.  
This title will not move  
This title will be appended  
3
Title  
Copy  
Edit Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
DVD RECORDER  
!
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Return  
Next  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1.2G  
1.2G  
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
OK to combine titles  
1 and 3 ?  
!
Yes  
No  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 74  
Chapter Edit  
4
Use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to  
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several  
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a  
Copy List title.  
find the place you want to divide the title.  
Divide Title (HDD Copy)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
want to edit.  
2
Select ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu  
5–1  
00.00.09.15  
panel.  
ꢆ
Play Pause  
Divide  
Cancel  
3
Select the type of editing.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
5
Press ENTER to divide the title at the current  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
playback position.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
Set Thumbnail  
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in  
the four-title display of the Disc Navigator for a title to any  
frame that appears in that title.  
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
1
Highlight the title you want to change the  
thumbnail picture for.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 74  
2
Select ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu  
panel.  
4
Select the command you want:  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you  
can find the frame you want.  
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use  
the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to find the  
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then  
press ENTER.  
3
Use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to  
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.  
You can also use the CM SKIP (SHIFT + ꢍ) buttons.  
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)  
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
1
XP  
Set Thumbnail (HDD Copy)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
Rec. time  
Chapters  
1h00m  
10  
1–1  
Play  
0.00.00  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
ꢅ
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
ꢆ Play Pause  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you wish (up to 99 per title).  
OK  
Exit  
• Erase/Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the  
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.  
Select whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
Move command only: Select the destination for the  
chapter, and press ENTER.  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Copy List screen.  
Recording Mode  
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command  
1
menu panel.  
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 P
Rec. time 1h00m  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a recording mode  
Erase  
Move  
Chapter  
0h01m  
Cancel  
for the copy.  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
1
• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
same recording quality as the original.  
2
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy List is  
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.  
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than  
the original, the copy will not be better quality than  
the original.)  
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:  
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER.  
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)  
If you select MN above, you can also change the level  
setting (MN1–MN32, LPCM or XP+ ) from the  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
Rec. time  
2
SP  
3
1h00m  
Recording Quality box that appears.  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
2,4  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
• Optimized – The recording quality is automatically  
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space  
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-  
time.  
Erase/Move  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Copy List  
screen.  
Note  
1.When copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.  
2.When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original  
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)  
on page 97).  
3.XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.  
4.Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
When you change the recording mode setting, you can  
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more  
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able  
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording  
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List  
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.  
3
Press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE (front panel) to open the  
disc tray and load the disc you want to make a back-  
up of, then close the disc tray.  
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video  
mode discs.  
Disc Back-up  
3
Press ENTER.  
No Disc.  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
Bilingual  
Cancel  
Start  
1
Select the title containing the audio you want to  
change.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
2
3
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command menu panel.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a bilingual audio  
Disc Back-up  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
option.  
4
Press ENTER.  
Cancel  
Start  
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY  
(SHIFT + HELP).  
Using disc back-up  
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE  
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.  
* See also Copyright on page 63.  
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy  
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to  
5
When the data has been copied, press ꢃ OPEN/  
1
CLOSE (front panel) to open the disc tray. Take out  
the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD.  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be  
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be  
erased in the back-up process.  
the hard disk drive , then on to another recordable DVD  
disc.  
1
Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc Back-  
up’.  
2
Select a back-up option.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc  
Disc Back-up  
Cancel  
Start  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing date  
Erase back-up date  
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW Ver.  
1.1 or Ver. 1.2 disc for the back-up.  
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot  
undo the finalization later.  
There are three back-up options:  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may  
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re  
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of disc.  
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of  
a disc.  
• Resume writing data – Record the back-up data  
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.  
• Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the  
HDD.  
Note  
1.It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data  
to the blank disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Cancel  
Start  
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY  
(SHIFT + HELP).  
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE  
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,  
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are  
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order  
to make it usable again—see Initializing a recordable  
DVD disc on page 52.)  
7
After the recorder has finished recording the  
back-up disc, you can select whether to make  
another back-up of the same data or exit.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc back-up finished.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
Cancel  
Start  
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel  
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,  
return to step 6 above.  
8
If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on  
the HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to  
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).  
Disc Back-up  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
No  
Yes  
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,  
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD  
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
CEhdapitetri8ng  
1
Use the HDD/DVD button to select the HDD or  
DVD.  
The Disc Navigator screen  
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video  
content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD  
2
Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.  
1
discs , as well as video content on the internal hard disk  
drive.  
View options panel  
Title list  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
Important  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Title list style  
Title list order  
4
SP  
Selected  
title  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input  
setting different to the current setting of the recorder  
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank  
thumbnail image. See also Additional information  
about the TV system settings on page 99.  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00  
Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
Recent First  
All Genres  
2h00m(1.0G)  
22:00 THU 2/12  
Genre  
selection  
22:00  
Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
19:00  
Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Available  
recording time  
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator  
Title thumbnail Title information Command  
menu panel  
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a  
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input  
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.  
During recording, these titles cannot be played.  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc  
Navigator then press ENTER).  
• From the title list, press ꢃ to display the command  
menu panel. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to  
navigate the menus.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
• When in the title list, use the ꢌ and ꢍ buttons to  
display the previous/next page if there are more titles  
than can be displayed.  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
• Press DISPLAY (SHIFT + HELP) to change the title  
information displayed in the title list.  
CHANNEL  
• If you are editing a VR mode disc you can display the  
Play List by selecting Play List from the view options  
panel (press ꢂ, then select Play List from the view  
options, then Play List).  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
ENTER  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Style  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
PlayList  
9
SP  
Original  
2h00m(1.0G)  
ꢋ
ꢊ
• You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc  
Navigator screens using the HDD/DVD button.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
Titles on the HDD marked with a  
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Setting a  
manual timer recording on page 44).  
icon are timer  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
TV DRECT REC  
Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon are recently  
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.  
3
To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.  
Note  
1.It isn’t possible to edit video on DVD-RAM discs using this recorder.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Command menu panel options  
The table below shows which commands you can use with which video type.  
VR mode  
(Original)  
VR mode  
(Play List)  
HDD  
Video mode  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Create (page 75)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Play (page 75)  
Erase (page 75)  
Edit > Title Name (page 75)  
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 76)  
Edit > Erase Section (page 77)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Edit > Divide (page 77)  
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 78)  
Edit > Set Genre (page 79)  
Edit > Lock (page 79)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Edit > Move (page 79)  
Edit > Combine (page 80)  
Genre Name (page 80)  
Multi-Mode (page 80)  
Undo (page 81)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Editing accuracy  
HDD genres  
Some editing (and Copy List) commands ask you  
whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or  
frame accuracy (Video mode compatible editing, or Frame  
accurate editing).  
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be  
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize  
your HDD video content you can assign different genres  
to titles. There are five genres in total, including five user-  
definable ones that you can name as you like.  
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is  
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this  
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use  
the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.  
Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit  
point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5–1  
second. On the other hand, these edit points will be  
preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video  
mode DVD.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Create  
Erase  
VR mode  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
Play List only  
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.  
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.  
Before you can use this command, make sure that the  
Play List Pis switched on in the view options panel on the  
left.  
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles  
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space  
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode  
DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only  
if it is the last title on the disc.  
1
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu panel.  
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R, VR mode  
or Video mode, will not result in any more free space on  
the disc.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
Play  
No title  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
1
2
3
Highlight the title you want to erase.  
Play List  
Create  
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.  
Undo  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
press ENTER.  
2
Select a title to add to the Play List.  
Tip  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to highlight an Original title then  
press ENTER to add it and display the Play List.  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when  
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing  
ENTER.  
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add as many titles as  
necessary to the Play List.  
Title Name  
Play  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long  
for VR mode and HDD recordings, and up to 40  
characters for Video mode recordings.  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
1
Highlight the title you want to play.  
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or  
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel.  
rename).  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command  
menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Play  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
2
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
4
Titles  
10Titles  
Edit  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
10
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
9
S
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Recent First  
All Genres  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
9
Genre Name  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Divide  
7
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
Chapter Edit  
M
u
lti-Mode  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
8
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Lock
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Cancel  
Remain  
30h30m  
7
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
Key  
1
Characters  
Key  
6
Characters  
Input Title Name  
12:30 Wed 4/01 Pr 1 SP  
. , ’ ? ! – & 1  
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
a b c 2 ä à á â ã  
æ ç  
p q r s 7 $  
2
7
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
*1  
ÿ/ß  
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –  
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
–
1
3
d e f 3 è é ë ê  
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡  
j k l 5 £  
t u v 8 ü ù û ú  
w x y z 9  
2
3
1
3
4
8
9
¿
/
2
/
4
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
0
5
0
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.  
ꢀ
[cursor back]  
[change case]  
ꢁ
[cursor forward]  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
ꢂ/  
ꢃ
CLEAR [clear character]  
ꢄ
<space>  
ꢅ
[finish name input]  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢂ/  
ꢃ).  
~
VIDEO  
Plus+  
(SHIFT  
+
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | + =  
{ } [ ] < >  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name below.  
MENU)  
*1  
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
Set Thumbnail  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the  
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in  
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in  
that title.  
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without  
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.  
1
Highlight the title you want to change the  
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name  
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts  
that you can use to input characters in the name input  
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the  
characters shown.  
thumbnail picture for.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command  
menu panel.  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you  
can find the frame you want.  
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are  
both on the same button (for example a P and an R),  
press ꢁ to advance the cursor one space manually  
between inputting the two characters.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Title name  
Set Thumbnail  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Divide  
9
Chapter Edit  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
Lock
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
3
Use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls  
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.  
(ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to find the start of the section  
to erase, then press ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
shows the start of the section.  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
Erase Section (HDD)  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
1
XP  
ꢆ Play Pause  
0h01m  
OK  
Exit  
Rec. time  
5-1  
00.00.09.15  
You can also use the CM SKIP (SHIFT + ꢍ) buttons.  
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.  
ꢆ Play Pause  
From  
To  
Exit  
4
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the  
Erase Section  
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end  
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.  
HDD  
VR mode  
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal  
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording  
made from the TV.  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
1
Highlight the title containing the section you  
want to erase.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command  
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not  
be able to erase very short sections (less than five  
seconds).  
menu panel.  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Divide  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
HDD  
VR mode  
Play List only  
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that  
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be  
recombined into one again.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu  
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
panel.  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 74  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
• Video Mode Compatible Editing – Edit points  
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-  
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 74  
• Frame Accurate Editing – Exact edit points are  
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode  
DVD will not be possible.  
4
Use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to  
find the place you want to divide the title.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 74  
Divide Title (HDD)  
4
Select the command you want:  
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
1
XP  
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use  
the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢆ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to find the  
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then  
press ENTER.  
0h01m  
Rec. time  
5–1  
00.00.09.15  
ꢆ
Play Pause  
Divide  
Cancel  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
Rec. time  
Chapters  
1h00m  
5
5
Press ENTER to divide the title at the current  
1–1  
Play  
0.00.00  
ꢅ
playback position.  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the  
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99  
chapters per HDD title).  
Divided titles cannot  
be combined.  
OK?  
!
1
2
Yes  
No  
• Erase /Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the  
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.  
Select whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
Chapter Edit  
HDD  
VR mode  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you  
can edit individual chapters within a title, with  
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.  
Erase  
Rec. time  
Chapter  
1h
Move  
0h
Cancel  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you  
want to edit.  
Move command only: Select the destination for the  
chapter, and press ENTER.  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command  
menu panel.  
3
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER.  
DVD RECORDER  
!
Please select the type of editing.  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
Rec. time  
003  
1h00m  
001  
002  
004  
005  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Note  
1.When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.  
2.VR mode Play List only.  
3.It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle  
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu  
Set Genre  
panel.  
HDD  
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Title name  
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to.  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command  
Divide  
9
Chapter Edit  
Recent First  
All Genres  
menu panel.  
Set Genre  
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Lock  
Cancel
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
2
SP  
Title name  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
1h00m(1.0G)  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Divide  
9
Chapter Edit  
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be  
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator  
with a padlock icon.  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
Lock  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Cancel
19:00 MON 29/11  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Move  
VR mode  
Play List only  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a genre for the  
title, then press ENTER.  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play  
List titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
1
Highlight the title you want to move.  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
No Category  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu  
4
Titles  
Free1  
Free3  
9
panel.  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Free2  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Free4  
Free5  
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
1
Cancel  
10Titles  
11/29 MON 7:00PM  
11/29Mon 7:00PM 
Title name  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
t
T
humbnail
2
SP  
4
Titles  
Se  
EraseSection  
Divide  
1h00m(1.0G)  
2
3
4
Remain  
30h30m  
12/2 THU 10:00PM  
12/2Thu 10:00PM 
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
Move  
Combine  
12/3 FRI 8:00PM  
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9
Lock  
Cancel  
12/3 FRI 11:00PM  
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
DVD  
VR Mode  
HDD  
Video mode VR mode  
Original only  
Remain  
0h30m  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased  
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock  
it later.  
3
Select a new position in the Play List for the title,  
then press ENTER.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
Important  
10Titles  
1
23:00 FRI 3/12  
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the  
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock  
command using the Undo option from the Disc  
Navigator menu.  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
2
3
4
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
Play List  
2h00m(1.0G)  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
DVD  
2
SP  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select one of the user-  
Combine  
definable genre names, then press ENTER.  
VR mode  
Play List only  
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.  
Free1  
Free2  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
This title will remain in the same place after combining  
with another title.  
4
Titles  
Free3  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Free4  
Free5  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
Recent First  
All Genres  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command  
Cancel  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
menu panel.  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
10Titles  
1
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Title name  
3
Input a name for the genre.  
• The name can be up to 12 characters long.  
Se
t
T
h
u
m
b
ail
n
4
Titles  
EraseSection  
2
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Divide  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
Move  
• For information on remote control key shortcuts, see  
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on  
page 76.  
3
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Combine  
Cancel  
4
19:00 MON 29/11  
DVD  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
Input Genre Name  
Free  
1
3
Select another title to combine with the first.  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
This title will be appended to the first title selected.  
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –  
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
–
/2  
/4  
´
Space  
OK  
Clear  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
4
To finish entering the name, highlight ‘OK’ and  
2
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
press ENTER.  
Play List  
3
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Multi-Mode  
4
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
DVD  
VR Mode  
2
SP  
HDD  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select  
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way  
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at  
once, for example.  
Genre Name  
HDD  
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command menu  
Use this command to rename one of the five user-  
definable genres (Free 1–5).  
panel.  
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
panel.  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Play  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
9
8
7
10Titles  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Recent First  
All Genres  
Play  
SP  
Genre Name  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
2
Edit  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
4
Titles  
7
S
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
Multi-Mode  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
S
Recent First  
All Genres  
Genre Name  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
7
Multi-Mode  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
2
Select titles from the title list.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to select. Selected  
titles are marked with a ꢅ.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
3
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel.  
Frequently asked questions  
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase  
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
When you erase titles from a DVD-R, the titles are no  
longer displayed, but the content remains on the  
disc. DVD-R is a write-once medium; it can’t be  
erased or rewritten.  
4
Titles  
9
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SNext  
Recent First  
All Genres  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
Single Mode  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
• I can’t edit my disc!  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
You may find that as the available recording time is  
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no  
longer possible. This is because information about  
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.  
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually  
preventing you from editing further.  
4
Select the command that you want applied to all  
the marked titles.  
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
3Titles  
10  
8
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Erase  
Lock  
4
SP  
4
Titles  
Unlock  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Change Genre  
7
Recent First  
All Genres  
7
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
Single Mode  
2
Cancel
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is  
automatically exited.  
Undo  
Video mode VR mode  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally  
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,  
you can undo the last three edits you made).  
1
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel.  
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
No title  
Play  
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
Play List  
Create  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
09  
Chapter 9  
Using the Jukebox  
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s  
HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your  
CDs. Once on the HDD, you can name albums, assign  
them a genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play  
to Jump.  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢇ
HDD/DVD  
CLEAR  
DISPLAY TV/DVD  
HELP  
INPUT SELECT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
CHANNEL  
Copying CDs to the HDD  
The first step is to copy some CDs to your HDD. This is  
1
done in real-time. All tracks are copied from each CD as  
an album. Although album and track names are not  
copied, you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox  
albums on page 83).  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
SHOWVIEW  
MENU  
TOP  
MENU  
ENTER  
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order  
they appear on the CD. If you want to copy them in some  
other order, set the CD to play in program play mode. See  
Program play on page 59 for how to do this.  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
ꢋ
ꢊ
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot  
be recorded back to a DVD-R/RW disc.  
REC MODE BACK CM SKIP  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
ST0P REC  
REC  
ì
SHIFT  
Important  
TV DRECT REC  
• During copying, no other recorder operation is  
possible.  
• Scheduled timer recordings will not start until  
copying is complete.  
DVD RECORDER  
• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.  
1
2
Press HDD/DVD and select DVD.  
Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD.  
If you want to copy the CD with a different track order, set  
the program play mode here.  
3
4
Press ꢅ to starts CD playback.  
Press ONE TOUCH COPY.  
Alternatively, you can select DVD/CD ꢄ HDD from the  
Copy submenu of the Home Menu.  
The CD can be playing or stopped when you press ONE  
TOUCH COPY. If the CD is playing, playback (and  
copying) will start from the beginning of the CD.  
Note  
1.The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
09  
Selecting a track from an album to play  
Playing music from the Jukebox  
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the album  
You can select albums or individual tracks from the  
containing the track you want to play, then press ꢃ.  
1
Jukebox to play.  
All tracks set to  
play  
1
Press Home Menu and select ‘Jukebox’.  
The album list is displayed.  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
10 Album1  
ALL  
1
Play  
9
Album2  
Erase  
New First  
All Genres  
8
7
6
5
4
3
Album3  
Album4  
Album5  
Album6  
Album7  
Album8  
2
Edit  
3
Play Mode  
Genre Name  
4
Disc Navigator  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
5
Initial Setup  
6
7
Video/Audio Adjust  
Photo Viewer  
21:00 FRI 25/03  
Repeat Off  
Total 12 1.14.58  
HDD  
1-10  
ꢅ
0.03.58  
Remain  
60h30m  
Juke Box  
Track set to Jump  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the album you  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the track you  
want to play and press ENTER.  
want to play and press ENTER.  
• You can play tracks that are set to Jump like this  
(after the track has played, the next track that doesn't  
have Jump set will be played).  
Album name  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
10 Album1  
ALL  
1
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
9
Album2  
New First  
All Genres  
8
7
6
5
4
3
Album3  
Album4  
Album5  
Album6  
Album7  
Album8  
2
3
Play Mode  
Editing Jukebox albums  
4
Genre Name  
5
A number of commands are available for editing and  
changing the playback behaviour of albums.  
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03  
Repeat Off  
Total 12 1.14.58  
HDD  
1-10  
ꢅ
0.03.58  
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the album/  
Remain  
60h30m  
track you want to edit.  
Info for selected album  
Playback status  
2
3
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a menu command  
• The album always plays from the first track. Once all  
tracks on the selected album have played, the next  
album in the list will play (excluding tracks that have  
been set to Jump—see Editing Jukebox albums on  
page 83).  
and press ENTER.  
• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an  
album are selected, the whole album is erased).  
• Edit > Album Name – Enter a name of up to 64  
characters for the album. See page Title Name on  
page 75 for how to enter names.  
• Edit > Change Genre – Set or change the genre for  
the album.  
2
• Edit > Jump Set – Set a track to jump so that it  
doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel  
the Jump setting).  
• Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums  
and tracks.  
• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters  
for a genre. See page Title Name on page 75 for how  
to enter names.  
Note  
1.The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.  
2.Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
09  
Changing the album view  
1
From the album list, press ꢂ to display the view  
options menu panel.  
2
Select the view option you want, then press  
ENTER.  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
bum1  
ALL  
1
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
Disp
New first  
m2  
N
Most Listened  
Album Name  
m3  
m4  
2
Genr
3
Recording Date  
Play Mode  
4
A
m5  
m6  
m7  
m8  
Genre Name  
Cancel  
5
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03  
Repeat Off  
Total 12 1.14.58  
HDD  
1-10  
ꢅ
0.03.58  
Remain  
60h30m  
• Display order  
New First – Most recently copied CDs appear at the  
top of the album list.  
Most Listened – Most often listened to CDs appear  
at the top of the list.  
Album Name – Albums are listed alphabetically.  
Recording Date – Albums are listed by the recording  
date (oldest first).  
• Genre  
Jukebox  
10Albums  
bum1  
Play  
Erase  
Edit  
ALL  
1
Disp
All Genres m2  
N
No Category  
m3  
m4  
m5  
m6  
m7  
m8  
2
Best  
Rock  
Pops  
Genr
3
Play Mode  
4
A
Genre Name  
Jazz  
5
Classical  
6
7
21:00 FRI 25/03  
Repeat Off  
Total 12 1.14.58  
HDD  
1-10  
ꢅ
0.03.58  
Remain  
60h30m  
All – All albums are displayed.  
Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are  
displayed.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
10  
Chapter 10  
The PhotoViewer  
1
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.  
Currently selected thumbnail  
PhotoViewer  
File  
Chair No.  
2
x
1920  
3
1440  
Date/Time 10:00 MON 24/1  
File information  
1
4
7
2
5
8
01. 12/12 TUE  
02. 12/13 WED  
03. 12/14 THU  
04. 12/15 FRI  
05. 12/16 SAT  
06. 12/17 SUN  
07. 12/18 MON  
08. 12/19 TUE  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
6
9
Pages in file  
view  
Pages in  
folder list  
1/2  
1/3  
Incompatible/unknown file  
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to select a thumbnail.  
• Use the ꢌ and ꢍ buttons to display the previous/  
next page of thumbnails.  
Playing a slideshow  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to  
5
Press ENTER or ꢅ to start playing a slideshow  
display the PhotoViewer screen.  
from the selected thumbnail.  
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc  
containing JPEG files is loaded.  
• Use the ꢌ / ꢍ buttons to display the previous/  
next picture, or the ꢆ button to pause the slideshow.  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that  
the disc and file formats are compatible with this  
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created  
disc compatibility on page 10).  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be  
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and  
right.  
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.  
This is normal.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select a folder from the  
folder list.  
6
Press ꢄ or RETURN to return to the thumbnail  
The first nine images from the selected folder are  
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.  
view area.  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder  
to load the file.  
7
To return to the folder view area, press RETURN  
(or ꢂ when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).  
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.  
3
Press ENTER or ꢃto move to the thumbnail view  
area.  
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.  
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or ꢂ  
when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).  
Note  
1.Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the  
Reload function (see the following page).  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
10  
Reloading files from a disc  
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or  
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload  
function.  
1
Use the ꢁ button to navigate to the last entry in  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
2
Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999  
files/99 folders from the disc.  
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the  
1
images.  
Zooming the image  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion  
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move  
the area of the picture displayed.  
1
During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button  
to zoom the picture.  
2x Zoom  
ꢄ
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and  
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the zoomed area  
within the picture.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow  
so you can always view pictures the right way up,  
whichever way they were taken.  
•
During a slideshow, press ANGLE (SHIFT + 3) to  
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.  
Press ANGLE (SHIFT + 3) repeatedly to continue rotating  
the picture in increments of 90º.  
ꢄ
Note  
1.You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will  
resume reloading.)  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
11  
Chapter 11  
The Disc Setup menu  
• Use the ꢈ/ꢉ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
Introduction  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢌ/  
ꢍ).  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the  
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,  
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu:  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name).  
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
Basic settings  
Lock Disc  
Input Disc Name  
VR mode  
VR mode Video mode  
• Default setting: Off  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder  
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from  
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name  
Disc Setup  
On  
Off  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Initialize  
Finalize  
1
function to change the default disc name to something  
Optimize HDD  
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the  
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.  
1
Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,  
then ‘Next Screen’.  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or  
erasing of the disc loaded . If you need to unlock the disc  
2
Disc Setup  
to make edits, select Off.  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Next Screen  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
Important  
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will  
completely erase the disc).  
2
Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long  
for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode disc.  
Initialize settings  
Input Disc Name  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DISC7  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
You can initialize a recordable DVD disc for either VR  
mode or Video mode recording.  
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
–
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
–
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be  
automatically initialized for recording according to the  
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 97).  
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
–
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
–
1
3
2
3
1
¿
´
OK  
Space  
Clear  
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ and ENTER to select characters.  
Note  
1.You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Additional information  
about the TV system settings on page 99 for how to change the recorder’s setting.  
2.You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Additional  
information about the TV system settings on page 99 for how to change the recorder’s setting.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
11  
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording  
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize  
them for VR mode recording.  
Important  
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.  
During optimization, playback and recording are not  
possible.  
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for  
example if you want to change the recording format of  
the disc. See Initializing a recordable DVD disc on page 52  
for detailed instructions.  
• Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the  
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly  
optimized.  
•
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.  
Finalize settings1  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Start Optimization  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
• Select ‘Start’ to optimize.  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on  
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.  
page 51 for detailed instructions.  
Undo Finalize  
Initialize HDD  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded  
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you  
want to record more material or edit material already on  
the disc.  
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem  
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.  
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for  
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.  
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.  
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs  
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If  
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be  
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc using this  
recorder.  
•
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Initialize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
InitializeHDD
1
From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then  
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.  
2
Select ‘Start’.  
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.  
Optimize HDD  
HDD  
You’ll see a message appear on-screen recommending  
you optimize the HDD.  
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file  
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the  
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented  
files.  
Note  
1.You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder.  
See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 99 for how to change the recorder’s setting.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
Chapter 12  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc  
playback, and for recording.  
You can press DISPLAY (SHIFT + HELP) to see the  
individual settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR or  
LDP).  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs  
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality  
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external  
input. There are several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings.  
Choosing a preset  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
1
With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU  
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
Pr 1  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
Disc Navigator  
Timer Recording  
Play Mode  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Photo Viewer  
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the picture quality  
setting you want to adjust.  
Jukebox  
Memory1  
Pr  
1
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Auto1  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the preset.  
Off  
Off  
Max  
Max  
Max  
CNR  
Pr 1  
Detail  
Min  
Tuner  
White AGC  
White Level  
Off  
Detailed Settings  
Min  
Max  
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the  
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.  
1
You can adjust the following settings:  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to progressive.  
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the  
channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for  
film material when the video output is set to  
progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto; try  
switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.  
There are six presets available:  
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts  
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
• LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs  
• Memory1 – user preset 1  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the C (colour) component.  
• Memory2 – user preset 2  
• Memory3 – user preset 3  
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
Note  
1.When the DV input is selected, only Prog. Motion and PureCinema settings can be adjusted.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level  
adjustment.  
• Memory1 – user preset 1  
• Memory2 – user preset 2  
• Memory3 – user preset 3  
1
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
You can press DISPLAY (SHIFT + HELP) to see the  
individual settings for the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP  
or Professional).  
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level (NTSC video input only).  
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of  
darker images.  
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.  
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green.  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.  
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours  
appear.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently  
selected picture quality setting.  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
Settings’.  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
You can now use the preset for any other input or the  
built-in TV tuner.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
Tip  
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to  
adjust.  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
Memory1  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
Off  
Off  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
playback  
BNR  
Detail  
Off  
White Level  
Black Level  
Min  
Min  
This setting determines how the picture will look when  
playing discs.  
You can adjust the following settings:  
Choosing a preset  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to progressive.  
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME  
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for  
film material when the video output is set to  
progressive. Usually this is best left set to  
Auto 1; try switching to Auto 2, On or Off if the  
picture appears unnatural.  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the setting.  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
TV(CRT)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
Detailed Settings  
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of  
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).  
There are six presets available:  
• TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs  
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens  
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors  
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
Note  
1.When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level (NTSC video playback only).  
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of  
darker images.  
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green.  
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours  
appear.  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently  
selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
Tip  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
Audio DRC  
• Default setting: Off  
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s  
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including  
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic  
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level  
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.  
1
During playback or when paused, press HOME  
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
2
3
Select ‘Audio Adjust’.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust DRC from ‘Off‘ to  
‘Max’.  
Audio DRC  
Audio DRC  
Off  
Max  
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the  
settings will depend on the material.  
Tip  
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via  
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to  
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range  
from your AV amplifier/receiver.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Chapter 13  
The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.  
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are  
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.  
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Basic Settings  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set  
automatically.  
Manual •  
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you  
can set the time and date manually.  
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.  
Input Line System  
525 System  
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.  
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.  
625 System •  
See also About the input line system on page 99 for more information on this setting.  
Power Save  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Off •  
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the  
antenna output when the recorder is in standby.  
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder  
is in standby.  
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and  
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.  
Help Setting  
On •  
Off  
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.  
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP  
on the remote to manually display the Help screen.)  
Setup Navigator  
Start  
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting  
up on page 25.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Tuner Settings  
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan  
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into  
channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel map-  
ping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to  
which program numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the  
Manual Channel Setting option below.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.  
Download from TV  
If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that  
your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then  
wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the  
channel mapping screen appears, as above.  
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more  
information.  
Manual CH Setting  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings  
made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual  
channel setting screen:  
• Change channel presets using the CHANNEL +/– buttons.  
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned  
to that channel), change the Skip setting to On.  
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your  
country or region.  
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the  
current channel preset.  
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off  
then adjust the Level setting.  
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters  
for the current channel preset.  
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder  
connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER), set  
the Decoder setting to On.  
Channel Swapping  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
Next Screen  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different  
presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go  
together. Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.  
Proceed to the next screen to assign channel numbers to the guide  
channels as necessary. Look in your TV guide to see which channel  
numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. Press ENTER  
when your done to leave this screen.  
Video In/Out Settings  
Input Colour System  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for each  
channel preset. Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the preset.  
On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect  
whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in  
some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed  
incorrectly.  
See also About the input colour system on page 99 for more information on this setting.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Component Video Out Interlace •  
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan  
video.  
Progressive  
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the  
operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not  
sure.  
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see below) must be set to something other than RGB.  
AV1 Out  
Video •  
S-Video  
RGB  
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video  
(compatible with all TVs).  
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you  
are using a long SCART cable.  
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check  
your TV for compatibility.  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect  
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 111).  
The Component Video Out setting (see above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.  
AV2/L1 In  
Video •  
S-Video  
RGB  
Sets the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to  
standard composite video.  
Sets the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to  
S-video.  
Sets the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to  
RGB.  
Decoder  
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2/AUTO START  
REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For scrambled channels,  
make sure that the channel Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual  
CH Setting on page 93.)  
NTSC on PAL TV  
On •  
Off  
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.  
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.  
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with  
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 99 for related information.  
Audio In Settings  
Nicam Select  
NICAM •  
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
Regular Audio  
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still  
switch the audio to record using the AUDIO (SHIFT + 1) button before  
recording.)  
Tuner Level  
Normal •  
Standard setting.  
Compression  
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing dis-  
tortion.  
External Audio  
Stereo •  
Bilingual  
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is stan-  
dard stereo.  
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.  
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or  
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
A/L •  
Explanation  
Bilingual Recording  
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to  
HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode ON, to DVD in  
Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source.  
B/R  
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.  
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except  
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.  
DV Input  
Stereo 1 •  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot)  
from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that sup-  
ports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio  
tracks.  
Input Level (L1–L3)  
-6dB – +6dB  
(default: 0 dB)  
Adjust the input level separately for each of the external inputs from  
–6dB to +6dB in steps of 3dB.  
Audio Out Settings  
Digital Out  
On •  
Off  
Activates the digital audio output.  
Deactivates the digital audio output.  
When set to Off, all the following Audio Out settings are grayed out.  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
Dolby Digital •  
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being  
played.  
Dolby Digital ꢄ PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your con-  
nected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.  
On •  
Off  
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.  
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use  
when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this  
case, use the analog audio outputs.  
96 kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
96 kHz ꢄ 48 kHz •  
Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your con-  
nected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.  
96 kHz  
MPEG  
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.  
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is  
being played.  
MPEG ꢄ PCM •  
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your  
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Language Settings  
OSD Language  
English •  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.  
available languages  
English •  
Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.  
Audio Language  
available languages  
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio lan-  
guage for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the  
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on  
page 100.  
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.  
Subtitle Language  
English •  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.  
available languages  
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle lan-  
guage for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the  
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on  
page 100.  
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.  
Auto Language  
On •  
On this setting:  
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language  
will play using that language, without subtitles.  
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but  
that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original  
audio track with subtitles.  
Off  
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle  
language preferences.  
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.  
DVD Menu Language  
w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the  
•
subtitle language.  
English  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.  
available languages  
Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for  
DVD-Video menus.  
Other  
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the  
ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on  
page 100.  
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.  
Subtitle Display  
On •  
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Lan-  
guage and Auto Language preferences.  
Off  
Select to switch off subtitle display.  
Assist Subtitle  
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.  
Some discs may override these settings.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Recording Settings  
Manual Recording  
On (go to setup)  
Off •  
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1–32, LPCM and XP+  
modes can be set.  
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be  
set.  
See also Manual recording modes on page 107 for detailed information on manual recording levels.  
Optimized Rec  
On  
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to  
fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality set-  
ting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1, then the recording will  
start at MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up.  
Off •  
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media,  
the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.  
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.  
Set Thumbnail  
0 seconds •  
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first  
frame of the title.  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10  
minutes.  
15 minutes  
VR Mode •  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when  
loaded into the recorder for the first time.  
Video Mode  
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.  
HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off  
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if  
you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.  
Video Mode On •  
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode record-  
ings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to  
a Video mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used.  
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off  
setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 95.  
Playback Settings  
TV Screen Size  
4:3 (Letter Box) •  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format  
presentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan pre-  
sentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine  
how 4:3 material will look.  
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override  
this setting.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Setting  
Options  
Field  
Explanation  
Still Picture  
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.  
Produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than Field stills.  
Frame  
Auto •  
The recorder automatically selects Field or Frame type still, according  
to the material playing.  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
On  
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the  
edit points.  
Off •  
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during play-  
back of a VR mode Play List.  
Set Password  
In order to change the parental lock level or change the country/area  
code, set the password using this option. From the following screen,  
enter a four-digit number that will be your password.  
Change Password  
Change Level  
In order to change the password, first enter your existing password  
and then a new one from the following screen.  
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a  
parental lock level.  
Country/Area Code  
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a  
country/area code.  
Only certain discs have parental lock and country code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your  
password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 111.  
Angle Indicator  
On •  
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a  
DVD-Video disc.  
Off  
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.  
Options  
On-Screen Display  
On •  
Off  
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.  
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.  
Front Panel Display  
On •  
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in  
standby.  
Off  
The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights  
dimly when setting a timer recording).  
Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3  
(default: Recorder 1)  
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to  
different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote  
controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The  
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.  
AV. Link  
This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby  
are not passed through to the AV output.  
Pass Through  
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for  
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG  
data is not passed through.)  
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 92) to Off.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
About the input colour system  
Additional information about the TV system  
settings  
The available options of the Input Colour System setting  
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below  
shows the different options available.  
About the input line system  
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC  
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input  
Colour System settings determine how the recorder  
treats incoming video signals from an external input or  
the built-in TV tuner.  
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input  
625 System  
Auto  
PAL  
Auto  
PAL  
SECAM  
n/a  
SECAM  
Auto  
Please note the following points when changing the  
input line system:  
525 System  
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel  
preset, changing the input line system will usually  
also affect the input line system of the AV2/AUTO  
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if  
the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2  
input is affected instead.  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
Additional information about component  
video output  
• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the  
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your  
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the  
front panel ꢄ button then pressing ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE  
(front panel) while the recorder is stopped.  
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to  
Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible  
with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see  
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and  
hold the ꢄ button on the front panel, then press  
ꢅ. This will set the recorder’s video output back to  
Interlace.  
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the  
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the  
ꢄ button and ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE buttons as described  
above, there is no confirmation, so please use with  
care.  
Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs  
Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets  
are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to  
be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan  
picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the  
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output (Interlace). If there  
are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model,  
please contact our customer service center.  
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems  
on the same disc.  
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour  
System setting also changes (see below).  
About NTSC on PAL TV  
This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays  
and monitors  
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the  
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when  
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table  
below.  
Plasma display  
•PDP-503HDE, PDP-433HDE, PDP-434HDE, PDP-504HDE, PDP-  
435XDE, PDP-435HDE, PDP-435FDE, PDP-505XDE, PDP-  
505HDE, PDP-615EX  
NTSC on PAL  
TV  
Output when  
stopped  
Input Line System  
625 System  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PAL  
PAL  
525 System  
NTSC  
PAL–60  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Selecting other languages for language  
options  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.  
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu  
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.  
2
Select the language you want.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD DVD Menu Language  
Tuner  
Audi
Language  
English  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language
Recording  
Playback  
Subt
0
1
4
Number  
Auto
5
DVD
Subt
• Select by language name: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to  
change the language.  
• Select by code number: Press ꢁ then use the  
number buttons to enter the four-digit language  
code.  
See Language code list on page 108 for a list of available  
languages and corresponding codes.  
3
Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Chapter 14  
Additional information  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
16:9 4:3 (Letter Box)  
Appearance  
The program is shown in  
widescreen with black bars at  
the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The sides of the program are  
cropped so that the picture  
fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
16:9  
The program appears  
squashed. Set to either 4:3  
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &  
Scan).  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is presented  
correctly on either setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
16:9  
The program is presented in  
widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the  
picture is presented—check  
the manual that came with the  
TV for details.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Minimum copying times  
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.  
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for  
compatibility.  
DVD disc type  
*3  
*4  
*4  
*5  
*5  
Rec  
mode  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/8x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/16x  
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/16x  
*1  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/6x  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.0, 1.1  
*2  
*3  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x  
1.5 mins.  
2 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
EP  
6 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
10 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
60 mins.  
3 mins.  
4 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
1.5 mins.  
2 mins.  
1.1 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
1.5 mins.  
2 mins.  
1 min.  
1.1 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
1.5 mins.  
3 mins.  
5 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
4 mins.  
LP  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
5 mins.  
SP  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
4 mins.  
XP  
10 mins.  
8 mins.  
6 mins.  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.  
*1 Compatible with single speed recording only  
*2 Compatible with 2x speed recording  
*3 Compatible with 4x speed recording  
*4 Compatible with 8x speed recording.  
*5 Compatible with 12x speed recording.  
Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being  
recorded.  
The table below shows 16x DVD-R and 6x DVD-RW disc brands that have been tested for high-speed writing  
compatibility with this recorder.  
*1  
*2  
16x DVD-R  
6x DVD-RW  
Maker  
Manufacturer ID  
Maker  
Manufacturer ID  
Sony  
That’s  
TDK  
“SONY16D1”  
“TYG03”  
“TTH02”  
JVC  
MCC (MKM)  
“JVC1Victord7”  
“MKM01RW6x”  
Maxell  
“MXL RG04”  
*1 Compatible with 12x speed recording  
*2 Compatible with 6x speed recording  
Note  
1.There may be cases where even 2x/4x/6x/8x/16x compatible discs do not copy at full speed. High speed copying is not possible when using  
discs initialized on another recorder.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
14  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this  
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the  
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the  
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The disc is automatically ejected  
after closing the disc tray  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or other incompatible format  
disc (page 9).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 111).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 114).  
No picture  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct  
input.  
• The recorder may be set to progresive scan with an incompatible TV.  
Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel ꢄ button then pressing  
ꢅ.  
Can’t play a disc  
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 9).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 111).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so  
for the condensation to evaporate.  
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System  
different to the current recorder setting.  
Can’t record a disc  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or other incompatible format  
disc (page 9).  
All settings are reset  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,  
all the settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the  
power cord.  
Remote control does not work  
No sound or sound is distorted  
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL  
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 98). (When  
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).  
• Replace the batteries (page 8).  
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume  
turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow  
motion play. Press ꢅ to resume regular playback.  
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or  
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make  
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Out setting is On.  
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,  
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.  
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Problem  
Remedy  
The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot  
is distorted  
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.  
The picture is distorted  
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 99). (You can also change it by  
pressing the ꢄ button and ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel simultaneously with  
the recorder stopped.)  
Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 97) is correct for the kind of TV  
zontally  
you have (see also page 101).  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the  
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1  
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio  
(standard) video.  
Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 51).  
recorder on another player  
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video  
mode and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW  
compatible in order to play it (page 9).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM  
compatible players (page 38).  
During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display  
or distorted correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
cessfully  
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.  
• The HDD may contain up to 999 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999  
chapters (VR mode), or 99 chapters (Video mode). Check that these limits have not  
been reached.  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 87).  
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the  
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV  
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line  
System setting to match what you want to record (page 99).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV  
cessfully  
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected  
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material  
(page 38).  
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will  
record completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from  
power failure the front panel dis-  
play shows ‘--:--’  
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last  
approximately five years from factory shipping.  
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the  
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.  
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’  
when a button is pressed  
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 47).  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Problem  
Remedy  
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for  
DVD)  
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a  
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One  
Touch Copy will not work.  
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch  
Copy feature can’t be used.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than  
HDD)  
999 titles on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.  
The picture freezes and the front  
panel and remote control buttons  
stop working  
• Press ꢄ then try restarting playback.  
• Press the front panel ꢇ STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then  
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold  
ꢇ STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the  
material in SP (or Optimized) mode so as to fit it all on  
to one disc (note that there will be a loss in picture  
quality if you do this).  
Frequently asked questions  
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked  
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it  
can do.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 63.  
• How do I make a high-quality copy?  
• Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping  
both audio channels and switch them on playback?  
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy  
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,  
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared  
to the original.  
Yes. When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off (see HDD Recording Format on page 97) ,  
both channels of the broadcast are recorded (unless  
you set the recording mode to LPCM, in which case  
only the channel set using the Bilingual Recording  
setting will be recorded; see Using the built-in TV  
tuner on page 29).  
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a  
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we  
recommend that you change the recording mode to  
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the  
available space on the disc.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 63.  
• Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than  
12 hours?  
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had  
the commercials edited out?  
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for  
up to 24 hours . However, because the maximum  
length of a title is 12 hours, the recording will be  
spread over two titles. Note that there will be a short  
break in the recording between titles.  
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit  
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to  
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out  
the commercials, then record that to DVD.  
See also Setting a timer recording on page 41.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 63.  
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-  
RW) to the HDD?  
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in XP  
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?  
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the  
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing  
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc  
as you want to copy.  
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of XP  
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a  
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could  
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of  
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using  
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 67.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the  
source component pauses playback or plays an  
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable becomes  
disconnected.  
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?  
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD  
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R  
or DVD-RW disc.  
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output  
functionality.  
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 67.  
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a  
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from  
the HDD?  
DV-related messages  
You may see the following messages appear on your TV  
screen when using the DV IN jack.  
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR  
mode disc. You can also divide the recording on the  
HDD into a number of smaller titles if the whole  
recording won’t fit on to one disc.  
• No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is  
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched  
off.  
• The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is  
recording, so you cannot start recording from the  
camcorder to this recorder.  
See also Copying from HDD to DVD on page 64.  
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another  
DVD player?  
• You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this  
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.  
Yes, you can generally play finalized Video mode  
discs recorded on this recorder on any standard DVD  
player. You may find, however, that some players will  
not play some recordable media.  
• No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no  
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.  
• The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The  
camcorder is in record-pause mode.  
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW  
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.  
• DV camcorder playback canceled.  
Recording has been paused. – Recording was  
paused because the camcorder is not in playback  
mode.  
About DV  
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder  
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the  
camcorder then switching it back on.  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-  
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV  
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.  
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This  
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.  
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.  
• Recording has stopped because the recorded  
material on the tape finished. – When the recorded  
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder  
automatically stops recording.  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format  
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and  
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.  
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at  
a time to this recorder.  
• Recording has stopped because DV camcorder  
playback stopped. – Recording stopped because  
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the  
camcorder was disconnected.  
• You cannot control this recorder from external  
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.  
• It may not always be possible to control the  
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.  
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please  
select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The  
camcorder is in camera mode.  
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as  
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/  
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo  
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see  
DV Input on page 95).  
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 or 48kHz  
(not 44.1kHz).  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
14  
The table below shows the approximate recording times for a VR mode and Video mode DVD in each manual recording  
mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a  
noticeable change in picture quality.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in  
Linear PCM format.  
Video mode Off (HDD)  
VR mode (DVD)  
Video mode On (HDD)  
Video mode (DVD)  
Resolution* Level  
Rec. time  
Level  
Rec. time Resolution*  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
41 mins.  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
MN 7  
MN 8  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
41 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
352 x 240 /  
352 x 288  
352 x 240 /  
352 x 288  
EP  
LP  
352 x 480 / MN 7  
352 x 576  
MN 8  
MN 9  
352 x 480 /  
352 x 576  
MN 9  
480 x 480 /  
480 x 576  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
XP+**  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
XP+**  
544 x 480 /  
544 x 576  
SP  
720 x 480 /  
720 x 576  
720 x 480 /  
720 x 576  
XP  
* The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.  
** XP+ mode is available for HDD recording only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be recorded in MN32 mode.  
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to  
one recordable DVD).  
See also Recording on page 37.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Laothian (lo), 1215  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Country/Area code list  
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702, gb  
USA, 2119, us  
China, 0314, cn  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr  
Russian Federation, 1821, ru  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
On-screen displays and recorder displays  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation  
of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically  
initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the  
recorder and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for file management data.  
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum  
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/  
chapters or combine chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-  
ization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the  
finalization in order to recording/editing.  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
• Could not record the information to the disc.  
• Cannot edit.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and  
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even  
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or some other  
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is  
dirty or damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-  
patible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/  
RW disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using Video mode  
recording.  
• This content is copy protected.  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder  
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual  
Recording] setting.  
When recording from an external input in Video mode (DVD), Video  
Mode On (HDD), or in LPCM mode, you can only record the left or  
right channel; not both.  
• Repairing disc.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when  
the power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The  
contents of the recording will be lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation.  
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the  
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a  
Pioneer authorized service center.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a  
cordable.  
blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.  
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input  
or the input signal is unrecordable.  
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to  
done using Disc Setup. maintain playback and recording performance.  
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to  
done using Disc Setup.  
maintain performance.  
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized.  
Please optimize again.  
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is  
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for  
optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from  
the HDD and optimize again.  
• This channel’s TV system is different from the  
recorder’s setting.  
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different  
from the TV system settings of this recorder.  
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel  
Press DISPLAY to clear message. set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.  
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,  
different than the recording.  
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to  
stop automatically.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Resetting the recorder  
14  
Damaged discs  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can  
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise  
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging  
the recorder.  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory  
settings.  
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully  
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not  
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all  
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped  
discs.  
2
Press and hold ꢄ and press ꢇ STANDBY/ON.  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
Handling discs  
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave  
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold  
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and  
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the  
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the  
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc  
becoming unusable.  
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,  
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly  
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a  
circular motion.  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in  
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction  
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are  
commercially available, we do not recommend using  
them since some may damage the lens.  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a  
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a  
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or  
other cleaning agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
Condensation  
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is  
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the  
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the  
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you  
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for  
about an hour before switching on and using.  
Storing discs  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl  
records, you should still take care to handle and store  
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to  
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in  
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including  
under direct sunlight).  
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a  
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing  
instrument. These could all damage the disc.  
For more detailed care information see the instructions  
that come with discs.  
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Hints on installation  
14  
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so  
please bear in mind the following points when choosing  
a suitable location for it:  
Do...  
ꢆ
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
ꢆ
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,  
shelf or stereo rack.  
Don’t...  
ꢇ
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or  
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-  
generating appliances.  
ꢇ
Place on a window sill or other place where the  
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room  
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other  
ꢇ
ꢇ
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in  
use.  
ꢇ
Use near a television or monitor as you may  
experience interference—especially if the television uses  
an indoor antenna.  
ꢇ
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder  
may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this  
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large  
ꢇ
ꢇ
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.  
Moving the recorder  
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if  
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢇ  
STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking  
that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.  
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power  
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or  
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be  
damaged.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
DRM (Digital Rights Management)  
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a  
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by  
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the  
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record  
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction  
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other  
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.  
Glossary  
Analog audio  
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.  
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical  
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See  
also Digital audio.  
DTS  
Aspect ratio  
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.  
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is  
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen  
is almost twice as wide as it is high).  
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround  
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a  
popular surround sound format for movies.  
Chapter  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on  
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See  
also Title.  
Dynamic range  
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds  
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting  
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are  
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic  
cinema-like effects.  
Digital audio  
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During  
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals  
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-  
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On  
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an  
analog signal based on these numbers. See also  
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.  
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)  
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still  
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers  
use this compressed file format which carries date, time  
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.  
Dolby Digital  
File extension  
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type  
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.  
ISO 9660 format  
International standard for the volume and file structure of  
CD-ROM discs.  
®
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to  
create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital  
sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilized  
instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc  
space, allowing for higher video resolution or extended  
recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using  
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-  
Video players.  
JPEG  
A file format used for still images, such as photographs  
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file  
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this  
format.  
MP3  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file  
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”  
or “.MP3”.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
MPEG audio  
Track  
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the  
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.  
See also Chapter.  
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD  
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format  
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV  
amp/receivers. See also PCM.  
WMA  
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an  
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft  
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using  
Windows Media Player version 9 or 10, or Windows  
Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by  
their file extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.  
MPEG video  
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD  
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the  
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Optical digital output  
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light  
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks  
using a special optical cord, available from specialist  
audio dealers.  
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)  
The most common system of encoding digital audio,  
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a  
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital  
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio  
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with  
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and  
MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.  
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)  
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through  
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good  
for discs that you would normally not watch from  
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.  
Regions (DVD-Video only)  
ALL  
2
(example region code marks)  
Regions associate discs and players with particular  
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have  
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of  
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are  
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).  
Sampling frequency  
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into  
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the  
sound quality, but the more digital information is  
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency  
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples  
(measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.  
Title  
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also  
Chapter.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
14  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
SECAM B/G  
PAL I  
Frequency  
PAL B/G  
General  
Frequency  
Channel  
Channel  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
47 - 89 MHz  
E2 - E4  
X - Z  
44 - 89 MHz  
A - C  
X - Z  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,  
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD,  
104 - 300 MHz  
E5 - E12  
S1 - S20  
M1 - M10  
U1 - U10  
104 - 300 MHz  
D - J  
11, 13  
S1 - S20  
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)  
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 W  
Power consumption in standby mode  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
E21 - E69  
302 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
E21 - E69  
0.93 W  
(Front panel display: off)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 kg  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 273 (D) mm  
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C  
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%  
(no condensation)  
SECAM D/K  
SECAM L  
PAL D/K  
Frequency  
Channel  
Frequency  
Channel  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
49 - 65 MHz  
FB, FC1, FC 49 - 94 MHz  
R1 - R5  
104 - 300 MHz  
F1 - F6  
B - Q  
104 - 300 MHz  
R6 - R12  
S1 - S20  
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/  
NTSC (external input only)  
Recording  
Hyper  
UHF  
300 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
21 - 69  
302 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
E21 - E69  
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording  
DVD-VIDEO  
Recordable discs  
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)  
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)  
STEREO  
B/G - A2  
I - NICAM  
L - NICAM  
B/G - NICAM  
D/K - NICAM  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz  
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz  
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
Timer  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)  
Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set  
75 Ω (IEC connector)  
Recording time  
HDD (80GB)  
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 11 hours  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 hours  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17–227 hours  
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Input 1,3 (rear), 2 (front)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),  
RCA jack (Input 2, 3)  
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output  
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)  
RCA jack (Output)  
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)  
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),  
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, 3)  
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output  
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),  
4 pin mini DIN (Output)  
DVD-R/DVD-RW  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 hours  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 hours  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–13 hours  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Component video output  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Supplied accessories  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Operating Instructions  
P , P : 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
B
R
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks  
RGB input  
Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1)  
RGB output  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)  
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R  
Input level  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject  
to change without notice, due to improvement.  
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),  
RCA jacks (Input 2, 3)  
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output  
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),  
RCA jacks (Output)  
Control input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
DV input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 pin (front)  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)  
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector  
This connector provides the video and audio signals for  
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.  
PIN no.  
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)  
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out  
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in  
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in  
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out  
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in  
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in  
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in  
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out  
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in  
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status  
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
DVD  
activity display 35  
A
Audio  
aspect ratios 97, 101  
backing up 71  
compatibility 9, 37, 102  
DVD-R vs DVD-RW 9, 10, 37, 102  
finalizing 10, 51, 88  
digital output settings 95  
DV audio settings 50  
dynamic range control 91  
external audio settings 94  
input settings 94  
initializing 37, 87  
setting preferences for audio language 96  
switching on playback 61  
switching TV audio 29  
Auto start recording 49  
Automatic channel setup 25  
AV amplifier, connecting to 19  
playback controls for 32, 53–62  
selecting for playback/recording 27  
Video mode vs VR mode 9, 10, 37, 74, 87, 97  
E
Easy Timer Recording 42  
Editing 73–81  
C
Video mode compatibility and frame accuracy 74,  
CD Audio  
97  
compatibility 9  
Video mode vs VR mode 74  
playback controls for 33, 55–61  
Chapter  
automatic chapter marking 97  
definition 113  
editing 69, 78  
H
HDD  
activity display 35  
maximum number per title/disc 37  
Component video 15  
Copying  
backing up content to DVD 71  
disk space and recording quality 107  
playback controls for 32  
precautions 11  
from DVD to HDD 64, 67  
from HDD to DVD 64–66, 102  
high-speed 63, 70, 102  
One Touch Copy 63  
real-time 63, 70  
selecting for playback/recording 27  
Video mode compatibility 37, 74, 97  
Home menu 34  
restrictions and copyright 63  
Video mode compatible and frame accurate 68, 69,  
70  
J
JPEG  
file compatibility 10  
viewing in the PhotoViewer 85  
Jukebox 82  
D
Dolby Digital  
explained 113  
L
output setting 95  
Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25  
DTS  
Language  
audio 61, 96  
code list 108  
DVD menu 96  
CD audio encoded with 33  
explained 113  
setting for menus and displays (OSD) 96  
settings for DVD playback 96  
subtitle 96  
output setting 95  
DV camcorder  
error messages 106  
recording from 50  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
S
MP3 audio files 9, 113  
MPEG audio 114  
Subtitles  
setting preferences for 96  
switching during playback 60  
N
T
NexTView 13  
NTSC 24  
Timer recording 41–47  
Title  
defined 114  
O
maximum number recordable 37  
maximum recordable length 37  
thumbnails 76, 97  
Optimized recording 45  
P
TV channels  
changing 29  
Picture quality  
manual setting 93  
numbering 29  
Recording - see Recording TV programs  
recording time vs 38, 107  
setting for playback 90  
setting for recording 89  
Play List  
compared to Original 11  
creating on a VR mode disc 75  
switching to Play List view 73  
Playback 29–33, 53–62  
on-screen displays 36  
parental lock for DVD-Video 98  
picture quality settings for 90  
settings 97  
V
Video CD  
compatibility 9  
playback control (PBC) 33, 53  
playback controls for 33, 55–61  
®
VIDEO Plus+ 43–44  
W
Progressive scan video 27  
WMA audio files 9, 10, 114  
R
Recording 28, 37–52  
audio format 38  
automatic chapter marking 97  
copyright and 38  
from a camcorder 50  
from an external input 48  
on-screen displays 36  
optimized 97  
settings 97  
simultaneous playback and 48  
time and picture quality 38, 107  
TV programs 28, 39  
Video mode vs VR mode 37  
Recovery recording 41, 45  
Remote control  
buttons explained 22–23  
changing the batteries 8  
operating range 8  
setting the remote ID 98  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2005 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002E  
Printed in China  
<VRB1379-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Baby Accessories SCF175 11 User Manual
Philips Computer Monitor 107561 User Manual
Philips Home Theater System CSS2123 F7 User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings 22FDF6023 User Manual
Philips Stereo Amplifier TDA1020 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System 920 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System DEH 14 User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PL052520202 User Manual
Pride Mobility Mobility Aid 14 User Manual
PVI Industries Water Heater CSX Single Exchanger User Manual